Home

Installation Manual

Contents

1. To Extension Ports of Non APT DPT Integration PBX To Extension Port of the PBX INSTALLATION 35 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION 2 5 TERMINAL CONNECTION 2 8 1 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal The programming terminal must be connected with a serial cable with an RS 232C connector at the EIA port This must be a null modem cable This enables system administration system setup mailbox setup and system diagnosis to be performed Communication parameters of the VPS have been set to the following values at the factory Table 6 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS Baud Rate 9600 bps Word Bit Length 8 Bits Parity None Stop Bit Length Bit 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable RECOMMEND Before connecting the cable make sure the power switches on both the data terminal and the VPS are OFF RSG Insert the RS 232C cable into the VPS with the connector indicating the same direction The cable must be shielded and no longer than 2 m 36 INSTALLATION 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION KX TVP50 9 pin 9 pin Cable Printer IBM PC KX TVP50 9 pin Table 7 Pin Configuration of the RS 232C Pin Cir
2. Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 254 Group member deleted 254 255 Group name erased 255 256 Group name not recorded 256 257 Group number number 257 258 has been erased because message 323 17 197 258 retention time expired 259 has not been received 323 17 197 259 318 17 197 259 260 HASH 260 261 Hello this is the voice processing 261 system 262 Not available 263 Hello this is the voice processing 263 system Available memory space is less then 20 Please erase unnecessary messages 264 hours time 72 264 332 72 264 265 HUNDRED 265 266 I have a call for name 266 267 I have a call for mailbox mailbox 267 number 268 I have a message for name 268 711 690 268 711 690 275 269 I was unable to reach name 269 270 I ll notify by pager 270 271 I ll notify by telephone 271 272 I ll redial number 272 337 273 I ll redial only once 273 274 If you are using a rotary telephone 274 618 stay on the line 274 275 If you want me to call back later 268 711 690 275 press 3 286 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS disabled Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 276 If you wo
3. Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 757 To turn off the prompt press 3 647 750 757 714 680 757 758 To schedule press 1 758 To use continuously press 2 To not use press 3 759 To use the system prompt press 1 759 760 761 604 759 760 761 696 605 760 To use user 1 prompt press 2 759 760 761 604 759 760 761 696 605 761 To use user 2 prompt press 3 759 760 761 604 759 760 761 696 605 762 TONE DIALLING MODE 762 763 Total message time available per 763 332 mailbox is time 764 Transfered number 764 600 765 Transfered time 765 766 TUESDAY 766 767 TWELFTH 767 768 TWELVE 768 769 TWELVE HOUR 769 770 TWELVE MINUTE 770 771 TWENTY 771 772 TWENTY HOUR 772 773 TWENTY MINUTE 773 774 TWENTY EIGHT 774 775 TWENTY EIGHT MINUTE 775 776 TWENTY EIGHTH 776 TEL TWENTY FIFTH 777 778 TWENTY FIRST 778 779 TWENTY FIVE 779 780 TWENTY FIVE MINUTE 780 781 TWENTY FOUR 781 314 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 782 TWENTY FOUR HOUR 782 783 TWENTY FOUR MINUTE 783 784 TWENTY FOURTH 784 785 TWENTY NINE 785 786 TWENT
4. Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 615 To answer the call press 1 615 Otherwise press 2 and hang up 616 To assign or edit mailboxes press 1 616 To delete mailboxes press 2 To reset mailbox passwords press 3 617 To call message sender press 1 617 To record a message press 2 618 To call the operator press 0 274 618 413 675 618 618 413 674 618 619 To call this person press 1 619 645 756 620 To cancel press X 620 To continue press 1 621 To cancel external message delivery 621 642 press 1 622 To cancel holding press 2 now 622 Otherwise I ll try your party again 623 To cancel mailing list review press 623 any key 624 To cancel this message or 624 verification press 3 625 To change caller ID greeting number 625 1 press 1 To change caller ID greeting number 2 press 2 To change caller ID greeting number 3 press 3 To change caller ID greeting number 4 press 4 626 To change group name press 1 626 606 626 606 656 731 627 To change the answer length press 1 627 748 749 689 628 To change the caller name and 637 636 634 743 628 number press 5 302 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s 629 To change the department dialling menu
5. To enable call screening press 2 To enable intercom paging press 3 To enable pager access press 4 To disable all transfer service press 5 Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 650 To clear all mailbox usage counts 751 650 press 2 651 To continue holding press 1 651 392 652 To customise your mailbox press 752 745 652 742 699 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 653 To delete all caller ID numbers press 653 392 1 654 To delete all group members press 1 654 392 655 To delete distribution verification of 655 this message press 1 To cancel message delivery press 2 656 To delete group members press 3 626 606 656 731 657 To delete members press 2 611 657 733 658 To delete the password press 1 658 694 659 To delete press 1 659 708 659 705 659 694 660 To delete press 2 612 660 733 661 To delete press 3 647 603 661 662 To deliver a broadcast message press 662 663 1 663 To deliver a message press 2 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 648 201 210 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 662 663 664 To deliver now press only the hash 148 664 208 sign 665 To deliver now press only the pound 149 665 208 sign 666 To enable call blocking press 1 666
6. Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 638 To change the recipient s name press 641 636 638 643 3 639 To change the setting press 1 639 603 733 640 To change the specified prompt press 640 1 To change all prompts press 2 641 To change the telephone number 641 636 638 643 press 1 642 To change the time and date press 2 635 642 621 642 643 To change the time and date press 4 641 636 638 643 644 To change this question press 1 644 748 749 689 645 To change to the next person press 2 619 645 756 646 To change user prompt 1 press 1 646 To change user prompt 2 press 2 647 To change press 1 647 603 532 647 392 533 647 392 647 603 661 647 603 682 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 613 647 603 721 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 42 647 392 41 647 392 647 750 757 648 To check the mailbox distribution 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 press 3 711 663 648 201 210 670 649 To check the mailbox distribution 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 press 4 304 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
7. 82 5 2 1 Custom Service Setting Example 0 0 0 82 5 252 Custom Service Features eee dba t ee eei ee eae 83 5 2 3 Custom Service Programming eese nennen nennen enne 85 2 2 4 Recording Menusz rne epe ete cete E ettet te eerta 88 3 2 5 Checking Operation GR eee RE GERE 88 5 2 6 Voice Mail 5 5 dae idem eed te Ee HE RUPEE Hei eth e 88 2 2 Mailbox Groups og au eoe fees 89 5 2 8 Extension GTOUDS tenete ei d e t tae e et andes ak 89 5 2 9 Interview Services a ca eR e E RU E E kink EUER 90 5 2 10 Automated Attendant rete nee Sa Los tee edn ad 91 5 2 11 Department Dialling Service neiii rnini erei aaie nennen 91 5 212 Operator Service ee Ede D ee et a ed 91 5 3 SETTING PORTS tona stross servirsi sotet isst n 92 5 3 T Port Service Menu eh a ieee G e el ene 92 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS 94 5 4 1 Automated Attendant Menu sess 94 25 4 2 Department Dialling ette ec ete eee eed ER eee tee ree iet 94 5 4 3 Operators Parameters 3 defe te p RR tbe teet esee egens 94 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES sisksasiecscecsteusasancectseoteceastsvotuctunscsetsvatvossaetsnatsuueupspevengetubsurvens 97 5 5 1 Mailbox Setting nii eieae E ede Ae 97 5 5 2 Entering a Mailbox de tee pottea e e 97 5 5 3
8. 212 212 213 213 214 214 215 215 216 216 217 217 Previous menu N Next menu S Next Screen a To create or discard mailboxes In the MAKE Make Delete field Type M Make to create the mailbox Type D Delete to discard the mailbox If there are more than 30 mailboxes the first 30 of them are displayed with Make and the rest are displayed with Delete Screen Output Assigned 30 Vacant 0 To change the status of a mailbox from Delete to Make first change the status of a mailbox from Make to Delete Screen output Assigned 29 Vacant 1 Then change the status from Delete to Make b Owner s last name Up to 16 alphabetic characters can be assigned as an Owner s Last Name 78 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 1 STARTING UP Note Mailbox numbers displayed on this screen Panasonic KX TA Series and KX TD Series Systems The same numbers as the extensions of the KX TA series and KX TD series systems that were automatically transmitted to the VPS Auto Configuration Non KX TA Series and Non KX TD Series Systems The same numbers as that of the extensions entered in step 3 The length of ma
9. ee cuta aee ere oet a a ine Piste rcs 100 5 34 Password Reset epe TR RR et eu ue tette eee hed 100 53 9 Mailbox Pasting koi eani ten De eene 100 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER spas 101 6 FINAL SETUP 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 lt 104 6 1 1 Accessing the Message Manager s Mailbox eene 104 6 1 2 Main Menu of Message Manager s Service 104 6 1 3 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6 998 5 4 esses 104 6 1 4 Customising User Prompts Enter 6 998 5 6 esses 105 62 SETTING UP MAILBOXES dE ENS LEVER uU RUN ARE 106 6 2 1 Recording Personal Greetings sese 106 6 2 2 Recording the Owner s Name ou eee sese aar 106 6 3 BACKING UP THE cni ids in iae eta 108 7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 14 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM 112 7 2 ro Rees epe 114 7 251 Off line Set ORLN tton eee bead rete ette prier ae 114 4 2 2 On line Set ONLIN walneal aii ih eddie ra REED 115 4 2 3 Set Password BASS hebt tabes ibi eec e Ci EET de da o deci 115 LYA Set Time TIME 5i
10. Table 44 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Alternate 2 5 digits Specifies an extension which requires a different Extension None transfer sequence than normal 1 32 Note The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned Alternate Extension Delete The system can delete extension numbers from the alternate extension group To select the Alternate Extension Delete Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 2 Alternate Extension Listing Lists all of the extensions registered in the alternate extension group 200 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS To select the Alternate Extension Listing Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 3 B5 2 Custom Service Custom Service is one of 4 incoming call services By assigning a function to each key a customised key operation service can be provided to callers A maximum of 100 custom services can be established up to 8 layers deep The Message Manager should record Custom Service Menus so that callers will know which keys to press To select the Custom Service Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 2 Custom Service No 1 100 Table 45 Parameter Value Range D
11. 28 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS 29 2 6 INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL EXPANSION MEMORY CARD KX TVP52 31 2 6 L General idee tme NER ERR i Eae E 31 2 6 2 Installing 52 enu eut stent trei eee buo 31 2 7 5 33 2 7 1 Connecting to the PBX eee eee et se elas 33 2 4 2 Opening the Ferrite Core need E leaden ates eer 33 2 7 3 Connection for APT rennen nennen enne 34 2 7 4 Connection for DPT Integration sose eisai iier erriei eei nne 34 2 7 5 Connection for Non APT DPT Integration 35 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION eene sns stas tn setas en sense tosta sensn nenas 36 2 8 1 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal eee 36 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable 36 2 8 3 BIA RS 232C Signals xi RBRUI ghe ne 38 6 Table of Contents 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 31 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION scccssssssssssssscsssssssscsssescncssssssssssssorsnesesones 40 3 1 1 APT DPT or Inband Signalling 40 3 1 2 Why Integration is Important seen rennen en enter en nennen 40 3 1 3 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate
12. eeesessesseeeeeee eene enne 194 B5 2 Custom Service ise eel es e er P tite eee eee at ton 201 B5 3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters essere nen enne 204 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS 206 B6 1 System Group Assignment essen eene nennen nennen trennen entere 206 B62 Time Service on eg ni e OO aes 209 Bb6 3 Holiday Setting een reete ot as ce m ar epi a a 211 B6 4 Daylight Saving Time DST esses ener ener entere enne 212 B6 5 Prompt Setting voi ecce iet et Rt er EE HEP HC HEP UO HUE HTC Le 213 B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement essent nennen 214 Table of Contents B6 7 Other Parameters freien eret recte ee eb 216 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS eeeeeerene 228 89223207 eareriteetese tiere rie ee AE 228 B72 Port Setting ex ee dti pee eed te ERR 229 B7 3 PBX Interface Parametets 6 oet tette eate deter enero rear a 230 Appendix C SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX ecce eere eee ee nne 240 C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES e eere ee ee ee ene eee ene e eee nest eee eene ee seen esee ea 241 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS eene eere eneen 244 C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
13. Table 41 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator 1 Disable Used to turn the Operator Service feature on or off Service 2 Enable Enable Note All no DTMF input calls in Automated Attendant Service are transferred to the General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator Service is disabled Operator s 1 5 digits Used to select the extension number for Operator 1 Extension 0 for KX TA 9 for Note 1 The default setting 0 for KX TA series or 9 TD senes for KX TD series cannot be used with the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature An extension number must be assigned that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan Note 2 The extension number must be an unassigned one Operator s 2 5 digits Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message in Mailbox No 998 this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 195 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table 41 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator No 10 60 s When a call to Operator 1 2 or 3 is not answered within Answer Time 30 the time set the VPS will offer other options as defined by the No Answer Coverage Mode Note This timer applies to Operator 1 2 and 3 Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how calls are handled when the Operator 1 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 3
14. eese errem 40 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration eene 41 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS eeeeeeeeee eerte eene ene tn aeta 43 3 2 1 General Guidelines and Definitions essen ener 43 3 22 RS3 232 Seung cb ae mech en dee Waa ol 43 3 2 3 oq ame ERREUR He PEG 43 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters 2 oae ee rp Pie ete ees 44 33 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBX Ss 47 3 3 1 KX TVP50 Programming for Inband Integration eene 47 3 3 KX TA series Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension 48 3 3 3 KX TD816 KX TD1232 and KX TD612 Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s EXtenslOfl ete det eere tete deporte ert dan 50 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 41 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION eere enne enses tn sensn nnne 52 4 1 1 Why Digital Integration is Important rennen nnne 52 4 2 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA series 54 4 2 1 KX TA series Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the Managers Extension inodo 54 43 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 eese eere 60 4 3 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for Digi
15. 140 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS Table 30 Port 2 Digital Analogue ports Dialling Method DTMF Pulse 10 20 pps Flash Time 100 300 600 900 ms programmable CPC Detection 6 5 150 300 450 600 ms programmable Type of Line Loop start minimum Loop Current 20 mA minimum Line Voltage 7 V DC minimum Ringing Voltage 40 V AC Extension Numbering 2 to 5 digits programmable Pause Time 1 to 9 s programmable Message Waiting Lamp Programmable DTMF sequence Main CPU 16 bit microprocessor Capacity for Flash Memory 2 h expandable Number of Mailboxes Max 32 including System Manager and Message Manager mailboxes Number of Messages Max 100 per mailbox programmable Personal Greeting Message Length 8 to 60 s programmable Message Retention Time 1 to 30 days or unlimited programmable Maximum Message Length 1 to 6 min programmable Reports Mailbox Assignment COS Class of Service Assignment System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Flash Memory Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report FAX Call Report Connections Telephone Line Modular connectors x 2 In case of Inband 2 conductor wire x 2 In case of APT 4 conductor wire with APT interface x 2 In case of DPT 4 conductor wire with DPT interface x 1 Data Port RS
16. Device Error Log Listing SAVE VPS Program amp Data Save VPS PC Xmodem LOAD VPS Program amp Data Load VPS Xmodem GPRN Parameter Global Printing VERS Program Version Check CREP no Custom Menu Information List no Custom Menu No 1 100 CCLR no Custom Menu Access Counter Clear no Custom Menu No 1 100 0 0 Clear All MWL MWL Retry count Set 1 3 MRL Minimum Recording Length Set 0 3 MPLT opt Registered User Prompt No List opt 1 gt User Prompt 1 2 User Prompt 2 None User Prompt 1 amp 2 QSET Quick Setup LMON Line Monitor PUTD DTMF Information Display Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting 7 2 17 Quick Setup QSET This command is initially used to setup the VPS very roughly when you use your VPS for the first time or after system initialisation Note Quick setup requires VT100 emulation software Type QSET then Press RETURN 126 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 7 2 18 7 2 19 Circuit Condition Display LMON This command is used to display the circuit condition every 1 5 s The command can be turned off by entering The following circuit conditions may be displayed Ready Possible to serve Incoming Call Service Processing arrival service Outgoing Call Service Processing sending service DSP Reset Processing Processing DSP reset disposition
17. ELOG DEVICE ERROR TIME CPU MEM GET 14 JUL 14 00 PM 2 CLOCK 14 JUL 14 00 PM 3 FLASH DATA R W xx yyyy 14 JUL 14 00 PM MEMORY 4 DSP SCAN 14 JUL 14 00 PM 5 DSP FIFO 14 JUL 14 00 PM 6 CPU APPLICATION x 14 JUL 14 00 PM Port number 1 2 Note The errors that can be identified by the system are displayed and explained in the following tables SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 117 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Device Error Log Indications Table 26 Indication CPU MEM GET Meaning CPU card software memory acquisition error CPU card is short of memory temporarily because of too much traffic CLOCK Clock access error Clock IC is out of order Check the hardware FLASH MEMORY DATA R W xx yyyy Flash Memory access error If there is a sector that often causes errors check the flash memory XX IDE error code yyyy read write error sector number DSP SCAN DSP SCAN error DSP is out of order Check the hardware DSP FIFO DSP FIFO error During the system is handling calls there is wrong with DSP and FIFO memory temporarily CPU APPLICATION x Application error While the system is handling calls temporary application error occurs port number Port number 1 2 Error Indications at System Startup Example of a terminal display when errors are generated Table 27 Indication Meaning ROM ERROR
18. 5 When system initialising is complete the following display will appear gt ON LINE MODE Note The execution time for System Reset Clear may differ each time it is performed because of system capacity and system programs Generally initialisation will take about 2 min to accomplish SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 113 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS In the Utility Command Mode the System Administrator can access the functions described below by entering the appropriate command at the prompt and Pressing RETURN To select the Utility Commands Menu follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 3 Utility Command Type HELP for command list Table 25 OFLN Sets the system to off line mode ONLN Sets the system to on line mode PASS Sets the System Administrator s password TIME Sets the system clock date and time PSET Specifies the reports printing time ELOG Displays device error log SAVE Stores a backup of the program or data in the flash memory LOAD Restores a backup of the program or data to the system GPRN Displays all of the VPS parameters VERS Displays the version of the program CREP Displays the keypad assignments message recording status and the tree structure of a Custom service CCLR Clears a Custom service menu access count MWL Specifies the number of times the VPS attempts to tur
19. eee eee eere ee ee entes ea teet ee eso sese eren 250 C5 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS e ecce ee eee eee enne 252 C6 DELIVERING MESSAGES eoe eoe s ino ioa annis edem nn dro Enea or Ue edu 254 C7 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX e eeeee eene 257 C8 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES eee 258 Appendix D MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX e ecce eere ene 260 D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX ee ee eere enun nne 261 D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 263 04 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX e eren 265 D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK eene ee eren ee ee eren neon oe ette toes ee 267 D6 RECORDING MESSAGES eere ee eere eee eerte netten eese enses ne teen eee 269 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS eee e eee ee eee eene eee toe e tetto sette tone ette 274 GIOSSSEY usos aco edad dr 321 Ide X ccce dosi A etii eror uU ep cR MM ees 331 10 Table of Contents Section VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 11 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO 1 1 1 Why Voice
20. Class of Service Setting COS Nos 1 62 for Subscribers shown To access Class of Service Numbers 1 62 for Subscribers follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 1 62 Table 36 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Personal 8 60 51045 Defines the maximum length of the personal greeting Greeting increments message that can be recorded by the Subscriber Length 16 This parameter applies to Personal greeting on No Answer Personal greeting on Busy Personal greeting for After Hours Personal greeting for Caller ID New Message 1 30 days Defines the number of days that an unplayed message Retention Time 14 will remain in the mailbox The days are counted from the day following the recording Saved Message 1 30 days Defines the number of days that a played message will Retention Time 0 Unlimited remain in the mailbox The timing is refreshed 5 whenever the message is played back If 0 Unlimited is selected the saved message will remain in the mailbox until erased by the Subscriber Message 1 6 min Defines the maximum message length Length 3 Mailbox 5 100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of both new and saved Capacity 10 messages that can be stored in each mailbox Maximum Messages Mailbox 5 100 min Specifies the total number of available minutes in each Capacity 10 mailbox for message storage both
21. 2 Press 6X9 9 8 to access the message manager s mailbox You will hear the following prompt if mailbox 998 has a password set Enter your password followed by a hash sign 3 Enter the message manager s password if programmed Otherwise you will hear the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service 6 1 2 Main Menu of Message Manager s Service You have number new message s To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages press 1 To set up message waiting notification press 2 To customise your mailbox press 3 To set the clock press 4 To modify message press 5 To end this call press X 6 1 3 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6 998 5 4 1 Access the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service 2 To modify messages Press 5 104 FINAL SETUP 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 3 4 To change the Custom Service Menu Press 4 Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process Example Custom Service Greeting Thank you for calling ABC Company If you know your party s last name you may dial it at any time during this message Note This prompt should match the prompt that is selected for each port The recording will be played directly after the call is received 6 1 4 Customising User Prompts Enter 6 998 5 6 The customer may want to enter user prompts in place
22. 7 1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM Initialising the system clears all voice data except user prompts and returns all system parameters to the default setting Throughout this section menu selections are indicated as System Administration Top Menu Selection Number This means that the System Administration Top Menu must first be accessed On the first menu displayed make the menu selection corresponding to the first menu displayed Repeat this process for each subsequent menu when additional selection numbers are listed To initialise the system follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 4 1 Go to the System Administration Top Menu 1 Program 2 System Reports 3 Utility Command 4 System Reset Clear 5 Quick Setup VT100 Mode Only Enter the number 2 Type 4 for System Initialisation System Reset Clear Menu 1 Mailbox No Length 3 2 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 3 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 Will you change the settings Y N 3 Type Y this places the VPS in the off line mode System Reset Clear Menu 1 Mailbox No Length 3 2 5 2 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 3 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 Are these parameters acceptable Y N 4 Type Y to start the system resetting System Initializing 112 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 71 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM
23. Press 1 to record a broadcast message 4 Record a broadcast message and Press 1 Un Press 2 to accept the message recorded Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes Messages can be delivered to more than 1 Subscriber s mailbox by specifying the mailboxes for delivery 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to deliver a message 3 Press 2 to deliver a message 4 Type the mailbox number of the intended recipient Note Enter by name by Pressing 1 first Use a System Group Distribution List by specifying its number 254 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE DELIVERING MESSAGES 5 Press 2 to accept the number if it is correct Note Add mailbox numbers by Pressing 2 Review the mailing list by Pressing 3 and cancel message transfer by Pressing X 6 Press 1 to record a message 7 Record the message at the tone and Press 1 8 Press 2 to accept the entry made 9 Press 1 to specify the delivery time and the private status Note Send the message immediately and return to the Main Menu by Pressing 2 10 Press 1 to specify the delivery time 11 Type the time and Press 2 12 Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM Note If 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in B6 5 Prompt Setting this selection cannot be done 13 Type the date month and day and Press 7 14 Press 2 to accept the entry made 15 Press 1 to make this message private otherwis
24. B4 1 Port Assignment To select the Day Night Lunch or Break Mode for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 2 Port 1 Day Mode To select the Day Mode Features for Port 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 1 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 189 B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE Table 38 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Incoming Call 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Service 2 Auto Attn Salter View Note 1 When you specify the Interview Service one of 4 Custom Auto Attn Subscriber s Interview mailbox numbers should also be specified Note 2 When you specify the Custom service one of 100 1 100 Custom service numbers should also be specified Incoming Call 1 System Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on Service Prompt 2 User 1 this port 3 User 2 Note 1 This parameter is not valid if incoming call User 1 ME ot service is set to Interview or Custom Note 2 If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below Prompt for 1 System Specifies in which language rotary callers hear the voice Rotary Callers 2 User 1 prompts when they cannot enter any digit to sel
25. If the unit malfunctions disconnect the unit from the telephone line and check the line by reconnecting the telephone If the telephone operates properly have the VPS repaired by a qualified service technician Unplug the unit from its power source before cleaning Handle the unit carefully Do not drop or otherwise expose the unit to physical shock Unplug and transport the unit to a service technician if the power supply cord is frayed or damaged if the cabinet is cracked or broken or when the unit has been exposed to moisture has been dropped or is not otherwise operating properly Do not install the unit near water or moisture heating appliances or electrical noise generating devices such as televisions monitors fluorescent lamps or electric motors Do not insert wires pins or any other material into the unit s vent slots or access points This could result in electrical shock and serious unit malfunction Do not block the vent slots and openings located on the front and top of the unit Do not overload wall outlets Overloaded outlets could result in fire and or electrical shock Do not disassemble this product Dangerous electrical shock could result The unit must only be disassembled and repaired by qualified service technicians Do not use solvents liquid cleaners water or abrasive powders to clean this unit Use only a damp soft cloth for cleaning Do not use the telephone during a lightning storm or to report a
26. The After Hours Greeting is played whenever the caller enters your mailbox during non business hours 1 Dial the extension number of the VPS N When the VPS answers Press 46 X then the mailbox number you wish to change o Enter your password if programmed then the key You are now inside the mailbox For mailbox management Press 5 To change the personal greetings Press 1 To change the No Answer Greeting Press 1 again do The system will then say No Answer Greeting is not recorded Record greeting at the tone 8 State your greeting at the tone Example Hi this is Tom Iam away from my desk right now but please leave a message at the tone and I will return your call as soon as possible 9 When you finish speaking Press 1 10 The system gives the options of reviewing accepting or erasing the message 11 To review the message Press 1 12 If the greeting is acceptable Press 2 13 The system will then play the menu for changing the No Answer Greeting Busy signal Greeting and the After hours greeting Record the busy signal greeting as you did the No Answer Greeting 14 Continue on to the After Hours greeting and hang up when finished 6 2 2 Recording the Owner s Name 1 Dial the extension number of the VPS 106 FINAL SETUP 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES 2 When the VPS answers Press 6 then the mailbox number you wish to change Ge
27. plays a set of recorded questions when a caller accesses the service The caller is provided an opportunity to answer each question after it has been asked Subscribers are able to record questions directly into their own Interview Mailbox See 5 2 9 Interview Service See Interview Mailbox No in Table 34 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Creating and Editing a Mailbox in C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See Interview Service in Glossary See 4 9 Interview Mailbox in the Subscriber s Guide 156 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Live Call Screening permits the subscriber to monitor incoming See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR APT DPT calls as messages are being recorded The DIGITAL INTEGRATION Integration Only subscriber has the option of answering calls See 44 1 Live Call Screening while monitoring or allowing the message to be recorded without interruption Two modes of this feature exist Hands Free and Private Hands Free permits the subscriber to hear the caller through the telephone s speaker and answer the call by lifting the handset The Private Mode alerts by tone and requires the telephone handset to be lifted before the message can be monitored Two way communication is established by pressing the feature button LCS Programming See 4 4 2 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment See 4 4 3 Live Call Screening
28. 753 698 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 735 To select caller select mode press 1 735 To select without message mode press 2 To select before message recording mode press 3 To select after message recording mode press 4 To disable all entry modes press 5 To accept press 6 736 To send to 1 recipient press 1 736 To send by mailing list press 2 737 To set call transfer status press 1 737 To set up covering extension press 2 To set message reception mode press 3 To set incomplete handling status press 4 738 To set delivery time or make this 738 603 message private press 1 739 To set delivery time press 1 739 For immediate delivery press 2 740 To set dial mode press 6 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 741 To set leaving a message status press 741 1 To set covering extension transfer status press 2 To set intercom paging status press 3 To set pager access status press 4 To set operator transfer status press 5 To set returning to top menu automated attendant service status press 6 742 To set the clock press 4 752 745 652 742 699 670 312 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 743 To set the group distribution lists 637 636 634 743
29. Enter your password if programmed then Press ft You are now inside the mailbox For mailbox management Press 5 To change the owner s name Press 3 The system will say Owner s name is not recorded Record owner s name at the tone State the owner s first and last name at the tone Press 1 when finished The VPS tells you the customer s name oo 9 Press 2 to accept TEST THE SYSTEM Before backing up the system call each extension to see that each port functions as it should Check for proper greetings and call transfers FINAL SETUP 107 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM 1 Choose the Utility Command Type SAVE then Press ENTER See screen output below from System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 3 Utility Command SAVE VPS Flash Memory Data Save VPS gt PC Xmodem 1 Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 Custom Service Menu 7 Personal Greeting Select No 2 2 To start Press 2 and then ENTER 3 Press RETURN or ENTER Following steps are for HyperTerminal as an example 4 Select Receive File from the Transfer Menu 5 Specify a folder where data is to be saved if necessary use Browse 6 Select Xmodem as the protocol to save data 7 Click Receive 8 Enter desired filename and click OK The file transfer screen
30. See Personal Greetings in Glossary See 1 2 Recording Personal Greetings in the Subscriber s Guide SYSTEM FEATURES 163 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Recording message instructs the caller in how to terminate the call access more features and re record the message Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Play System Prompt allows the Guidance for Recording See Play System Prompt after After Personal message to be played for the caller after the Personal Greeting in Table 36 Greeting Personal Greeting The Guidance for inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Port Service allows call services to be assigned to each port The incoming call service determines which service is used when answering incoming calls These services include Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service See 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS See B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Private Message allows a subscriber and the System Manager to specify a message as Private when sentto other subscribers the Message Manager and or the System Manager Such a message cannot be transferred Messages recorded in the Voice Mail Service can also be specified as Private See Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes in C6 DELIVERING MESSAGES See Private Message in
31. See dp 116 7 2 5 Print Reports at Specified Time PSET sese 116 7 2 6 Error Log Display EL OG a n ee ede iae 117 7 2 7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device SAVE 119 7 2 8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS LOAD seen 121 Table of Contents 7 2 9 Print All of the VPS Parameters GPRN cccccccsssccccessccecesseceecseseeeeseeeeeeessaeeenees 122 7 2 10 Program Version Display VERS essere 122 7 2 11 Custom Service Report CREP esses enne enses 122 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR sss 124 7 2 13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times 2 2 124 7 2 14 Setting Minimum Recording Length MRL eene 124 7 2 15 Modified Prompt List MPLT 000 cee nennen enne entere 125 7 2 16 Utility Command List HELP eese nennen enne entere nennen 126 1 2 TT Quick Setup ta oe dene et ete 126 7 2 18 Circuit Condition Display 127 7 2 19 Information Display PUTD eene 127 Tide SYSTEM REPORTIS IER DA ts bita 129 7 3 1 Mailbox Assignments eee Iudei lode hee 129 7 3 2 COS Class of Service ASSignMentS cuiners enne 130 1 3 3 Syste
32. Station to Station DTMF Signalling For system users to access VPS services and features they must be able to send tones from their telephones to the VPS port As a general rule SLT sets can perform station to station DTMF signalling however many proprietary telephones cannot Some PBXs need to be programmed to make proprietary sets use DTMF signalling If the PBX does not provide station to station DTMF signalling VPS services and features will be limited TEST Call an SLT extension from the telephone in question When the call is answered see if the person receiving the call hears DTMF tones when numbers are dialled Message Waiting Notification from an SLT The PBX extensions should light a lamp or receive stutter dial tone when the Message Waiting Lamp On code is dialled by the VPS The VPS functions best when the extension number of the voice mailbox owner follows the Light On or Light Off code On some PBXs however the extension number is dialled first followed by a hookswitch flash and then the On code This presents a problem if the extension is answered before the VPS sends the hook switch flash If the PBX does not provide message waiting notification from an SLT the VPS can only notify mailbox owners by dialling a beeper pager number or user assigned extension INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 41 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION This process slows down VPS performa
33. 210 670 202 For department dialling press X 412 675 202 412 674 202 203 For example to enter 5 o clock press 203 5 and the hash sign or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and the hash sign 204 For example to enter 5 o clock press 204 5 and the pound sign or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and the pound sign 205 For example to enter January press 1 205 and the hash sign 206 For example to enter January press 1 206 and the pound sign 207 For external message delivery press 3 207 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 283 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 208 For help press 0 149 208 149 665 208 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 706 679 753 208 143 208 141 208 148 208 148 664 208 142 208 140 208 209 For interview mailbox management 209 press 1 210 For mailbox management press 5 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 648 201 210 670 211 For notification by telephone press 1 211 For notification by pager press 2 212 For other features press 6 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 213 For the next name press 2 602 213 718 671 214 FORTY 214 215 FORTY MINUTE 215 216 F
34. 258 158 379 17 318 17 305 816 17 159 17 318 17 197 259 18 number attempts were busy 18 19 number attempts were no answer 19 20 number attempts were successful 20 21 AUGUST 21 22 Auto forwarding disabled 22 23 Auto forwarding enabled 23 24 because message retention time 157 815 24 expired 25 Pager access disabled 25 26 Pager access enabled 26 27 Pager callback number entry mode is 27 after message recording 28 Pager callback number entry mode is 28 before message recording 29 Pager callback number entry mode is 29 caller select 30 Pager callback number entry mode is 30 without message 3l being delivered now 324 31 32 Busy signal greeting is message 32 33 Busy signal greeting is not recorded 33 34 Call blocking enabled 34 35 Call screening enabled 35 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 275 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 36 Call transferred from the voice 36 processing system 37 CALLBACK NUMBER 37 38 Caller ID number 38 252 38 253 39 Caller ID number and caller name 39 deleted 40 Caller ID number entries for this box 40 are full there are 30 entries for caller ID allowed 41 Caller ID number is telephone 41 number 41 647 392 42
35. Caller ID List No 1 120 Table 55 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Caller ID No Up to 20 digits Assigns the telephone number for which the VPS consisting of 1 9 0 announces pre recorded caller name to extension None users Description Up to 20 characters Enters a name and or description of the Caller ID None number Any ASCII character except can be used System Caller Name Announcement Delete Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Delete follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 2 Caller ID List No 1 120 System Caller Name Announcement Listing Displays all Caller ID List numbers SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 215 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Listing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 3 B6 7 Other Parameters To access the proper menu for Other Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 Other Parameters Extension Numbering Plan Used to specify the extension numbers of the PBX so that the VPS is able to recognise the dialled extension as valid This setting promotes the call handling of the Au
36. Description Default Description Function The Extension 2 5 Digits Sets the extension to be used in conjunction with the of the Owner None mailbox Any valid number can be assigned Owner First Up to 16 The Dial by Name feature uses the last name Both are Name alphabetic printed on mailbox report Ownsrast characters Name None CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 97 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES Table 23 Description Description Function Class of COS No 1 62 Used to define a set of services available to the subscriber Service No 1 63 and 64 are fixed to the Message and System Managers Most subscribers can be placed in the same COS Anyone who needs unclaimed messages forwarded to a cell phone beeper pager or another mailbox would need to be in a separate COS Covering 2 5 Digits Specifies where a caller will be transferred when Extension Covering Extension is dialled or set under Incomplete None Call Handling Interview 2 5 Digits Used to permit mailbox owner to have an interview Mailbox mailbox Must be unused mailbox Number None All Calls 1 Yes If set to Yes calls coming to the extension through Transfer to 2 No Automated Attendant go directly to the mailbox and do Mailbox not ring the extension Message Waiting Lamp will not No be turned on From Mailbox Setting Enter The Number 1 Enter the Mailbox number Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Menu 1 Ma
37. Enter a System Group Distribution Lists number to be labelled List numbers are assigned by the System Administrator For the Multilingual Selection Menu Go to Step 5 The VPS plays the current message Press 1 to change the message If a message has not yet been recorded go to Step 7 Press 1 to record the message Press 2 to erase the current message and return to Step 3 or 4 Record the message at the tone and Press 1 Press 2 to accept the message Note Press 1 to review the recorded message Press 3 to erase the recorded message and try again Return to Step 7 Press 4 to add a message Press X to erase the recorded message and exit Return to Step 3 Other Custom Service Menus and or Voice Labels can be recorded by repeating Steps 3 8 Recording User Prompts Log in the Main Menu Press 5 to modify messages Press 6 to modify user prompts Press 1 to change User Prompt 1 or 2 to change User Prompt 2 To change specified prompts go to Step 6 To change all prompts in a row without reviewing the current recording go to Step 7 To change specified prompts 270 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D6 RECORDING MESSAGES a Press 1 b Enter the prompt number you want to change There is a complete list of modifiable prompts at the end of this section c The VPS plays the prompt number d Press 1 to change the prompt If a prompt has no
38. Mailbox Management Allows a subscriber to alter the setting for personal mailboxes Menu A list of choices from which the user can select by using the telephone keypad or the keys from a personal computer Message Manager Mailbox 998 The person who takes care of the General Delivery Mailbox records custom service menus system caller names and the User 1 User 2 voice prompts He has limited system programming capabilities Message Retention Time The amount of time the system will store a message before deleting the message Glossary 325 Message Retrieval Order The order in which the subscriber retrieves messages Last In First Out LIFO or First In First Out FIFO Message Transfer Allows a subscriber to reroute a message to another mailbox unless the message was marked private Additional comments can be added to this message Message Waiting Lamp Light on proprietary telephones that lights when there are messages in the mailbox Message Waiting Notification The VPS can notify subscribers and the Message Manager when they have received messages if authorised by the System Administrator or the System Manager Notification methods are 1 by Message Waiting Lamp or 2 by telephone or 3 by beeper pager Multilingual Selection Menu This menu is recorded by the Message Manager and allows callers to choose the language they want System User 1 or User 2 prompts when they call the VPS Non Subscri
39. New Message Retention Time Maximum time is 30 days Saved Message Retention Time Up to 30 days 0 Unlimited Message Length Length ranges from 1 6 min Number of Messages The number of messages range from 5 100 Total Message Time Total message time ranges from 5 100 min Message Retrieval Order Settings are LIFO last in first out or FIFO first in first out Message Scanning with Information Settings are enable or disable Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting Status Settings are enable or disable Call Waiting on Busy Status Settings are enable or disable Message Cancel for Live Call Screening Status Settings are enable or disable Direct Mailbox Access Status Settings are enable or disable Intercom Paging Group Number 1 9 Subscriber Service Prompt Mode 1 System Prompt 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement 0 30 Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID Settings are enable or disable Caller ID Screening Settings are enable or disable Message Notification Status Settings are enable or disable External Message Delivery Status Settings are enable or disable Auto Forwarding Status Settings are enable or disable Not available for COS No 63 Message Manager and COS No 64 System Manager Not available for COS No 64 System Manager Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager cannot set
40. To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 1 Holiday No 1 20 Table 52 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Name of Up to 16 characters For reference Any alphanumeric character plus Holiday None space and can be used Date DD Day Specifies the date of the holiday MM Month None Retain Holiday 1 No Used to store the Holiday Service setting for future 2 Yes use If set to Yes the same setting will be activated No automatically on the same day every year If set to No the setting will be cancelled automatically after the holiday is over SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 211 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Auto Attn Table 52 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Service 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services for the 2 Auto Attn holiday 3 Interview 4 Custom Note When Interview Service is specified one of Subscriber s Interview Mailbox numbers should also be specified When the Custom Service is specified one of Custom Service numbers 1 100 should also be specified Port Affected Port No 1 2 Specifies the port number on which the Holiday Service setting is activated At least 1 port must be specified The unspecified port provides the usual incoming call
41. To select the Mailbox Assignments Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 129 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS Mailbox Assignments 28 JUL 1999 11 30 AM MBOX Extn Name Fir Lst COS CExtn IVMBOX AITrf MNist MN2nd MN3rd 510 21 JONE DELY 2 61 621 511 22 2 62 611 Tel 512 23 MAY 16 63 612 Tel Bep 520 310 1 X Tel Bep 521 320 DAVE 1 888 5 ses 522 4100 CLUS ALCC 21 523 4201 WHIT BLUE 32 642 COS Class of Service CExtn Covering Extension IVMBOX Interview Mailbox AlTrf All Call Transfer to Mailbox MNIst Message Notification Device 1 MN2nd Message Notification Device 2 MN9rd Message Notification Device 3 Bep Beeper Pager Tel Telephone Note An X displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to YES 7 3 2 COS Class of Service Assignments This report provides information concerning all Class of Service numbers For a complete explanation of COS parameters please see Table 36 and Table 37 in Appendix B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS To select the COS Assignments Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 2 COS Assignments 29 JUL 1999 11 30 AM COS GL
42. 1 to change the current date 8 Type the current month and Press Note Press 0 for help For example to enter January press I and 9 Type the day and Press MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 267 05 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK 10 Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press 11 Press 2 to accept the date entered 268 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D6 RECORDING MESSAGES D6 RECORDING MESSAGES The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages specifically menus voice labels user prompts and system caller names He is responsible for maintaining the following The Department Dialling Menu maximum length 6 min A caller can access departments with the touch of one key Nine Department Dialling selections 1 to 9 can be recorded The Custom Service Menus maximum length 6 min each Up to 100 custom service menus can be recorded These menus guide callers to the services they require without the need for a human operator This is the most useful and powerful feature of your Panasonic Voice Processing System For example the Message Manager can record menus in a wide variety of foreign languages The Voice Labels maximum length 6 min each Up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists can be created by the System Administrator Each list can have a voice label The User Prompts maximum length 6 min each There are 3 kinds of voice mail prompts 1 System
43. 7 2 19 Information Display PUTD For example you might see this Custom 3X This indicates the name was automatically registered in the VPS Call Transfer Custom Extn Mbx None Specifies the destination to which the call from an assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded The Custom setting enter C enables callers to be forwarded to the specified Custom Service menu The Extn setting enter E enables callers to be forwarded to the specified extension The Mbx setting enter M enables callers to leave messages in the specified mailbox A System Group Distribution List number can be specified here instead of a mailbox number Caller ID Call Routing Delete Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list as shown To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing Delete follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 2 Caller ID List No 1 120 Caller ID Call Routing Listing Displays all Caller ID List numbers as shown To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing Listing follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 205 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 1 System Group Assignment shown To access the proper menu for System G
44. Call Waiting 1 Hold The caller is automatically placed on hold and 4 Disconnect the Operator 1 extension is called again or 2 No Answer Coverage The caller is offered one of the Hold options specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode 3 Call Waiting Operator 1 is signaled when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message The VPS disconnects the call after playing Thank you for calling No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how Operator 1 calls are handled when not Coverage 2 Leave Message answered within the time period set through the Operator Mode 3 Disconnect No Answer Time mode Message 4 Next Operator Caller Select This selection allows the caller to leave Caller Select a message or call another extension 2 Leave Message The caller is instructed to leave a message in Operator 1 mailbox 3 Disconnect Message The caller is disconnected after playing Thank you for calling 4 Next Operator The system transfers the call to Operator 2 Message 1 3 times Specifies the number of times that the system will play the Repeat Cycle 3 Automated Attendant top menu Note Extension Call Forwarding to the VPS can override the operator call coverage settings depending on the timing parameters of the PBX and VPS Even if the operator call coverage parameters are set to Next Operator on Busy No Answer the call may go to the VPS if the Operator has set the call forwardin
45. MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 305 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 667 To end recording hang up 667 To cancel your message press X if you have a touch tone phone 668 To end recording hang up or press 1 668 702 for more features 669 To end recording press 1 669 702 669 521 669 702 670 To end this call press X 717 725 670 717 725 734 683 670 720 670 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 648 201 210 670 752 745 652 742 699 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 671 To enter a new name or mailbox 602 213 718 671 press X 672 To enter another extension press X 672 673 To enter another extension press 2 695 673 674 To enter by name press the hash sign 413 674 and 1 413 674 618 412 674 412 674 202 151 674 131 674 675 To enter by name press the pound 413 675 sign and 1 413 675 618 412 675 412 675 202 151 675 131 675 676 To enter your callback number press 676 392 1 677 To erase and exit press 732 603 678 614 677 732 601 678 677 306 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked t
46. See System Group Assignment Mailbox Group in B6 1 System Group Assignment See C6 DELIVERING MESSAGES See System Group Distribution List in Glossary Hold provides the caller with the option of temporarily holding the call when the line is busy The VPS automatically recalls the extension after a specified period of time When several callers hold their calls to the same extension callers are connected in the order in which they originally called See Other Parameters Call Hold in B6 7 Other Parameters Holiday Service permits the system to record store and play several different holiday greetings Up to 20 holidays can be programmed See B6 3 Holiday Setting SYSTEM FEATURES 153 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Inband Integration allows the PBX using Inband Integration to send information to the VPS using tones Inband integration is characterized as Voice Mail Integration and DTMF Tone Integration Voice Mail Integration works with the Call Forwarding Feature of the PBX to permit a caller to leave a message when the mailbox number of the called extension is not known DTMF Tone Integration works with the Automated Attendant Service to enable the VPS to immediately recognise the state of the call busy answered ringing etc and improve its call handling performance See Voice Mail in 1 3 3 Which Phone Sy
47. Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp on the extension when a new message is recorded in the Message Manager s Mailbox 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status 4 Press 1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status or 2 to accept it Setting Notification by Calling Status The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper when a new message is recorded in the mailbox Set the following parameters as appropriate Setting Device Status For each device the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule The Message Manager cannot enable a device according to a schedule The System Administrator must accomplish this task see Time Frame 1 2 in Table 35 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 2 to change the notification method 4 Press 1 2 or 3 to select the device status 1 Schedule enabled on the schedule 2 Continuously enabled whole day MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 263 D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 3 Not Use disabled whole day Assigning Notification Numbers Up to 3 telephone or beeper pager numbers can be set for message notification The 0 to 9 keys the tone pulse switch and the beeper pager Callback Number Di
48. The current forwarding mailbox number is played Press 1 to change the mailbox number Type the mailbox number d Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it e The current delay time is played Press 1 to change the setting The delay time is the period of time that must pass before the message is automatically forwarded For example 1 h and 15 min is 11555 30 min is 30 f Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it g The current forwarding mode is played Press 1 to change the setting copy or move h Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 249 C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK The system clock can be set directly from the telephone It is important to set the exact time because Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery redialling and rescheduling of External Message Delivery and Automatic Message Deletion are all scheduled using this setting The System Administrator and Message Manager are also able to set this clock The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and ends Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager cannot set the system clock and Sorry this function is not available is played Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 3 to set the time and date 4 Press 1
49. When System Prompts are in use the parameter is set to After B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to announce pre recorded Caller ID caller names when extension users listen to messages from the assigned numbers left in their mailbox Extension users can also hear caller names when calls from the assigned numbers are transferred to them from the VPS Caller ID Screening The recorded caller names will also 2 4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS be heard when the callers use the Intercom Paging features The recorded names will be added to the end of the page The Caller ID Screening feature is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings This feature is also enabled by selecting Call Screening in 4 1 Call Transfer Status in the Subscriber s Guide The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting Intercom Paging in 4 1 Call Transfer Status and or in 4 3 Incomplete Call Handling in the Subscriber s Guide System Caller Names are recorded by the Message Manager To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 System Caller Name Announcement Enter To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 1
50. Y yes or no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Mailbox Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 7 3 11 Fax Call Report The Fax Call Report provides information about fax transfer when the VPS receives a fax signal It includes the fax data receiving date the port number used and the fax transfer status for up to 64 fax messages To select the Fax Call Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 8 Fax Call Report 14 NOV 1999 3 50 PM DATE TIME PORT FAX 1 FAX 2 11 JAN 11 15 AM 1 connect 01 MAR 07 58 PM 2 busy no ans O1 MAR 10 23 AM 1 busy connect FAX 1 Main facsimile machine FAX 2 Alternate facsimile machine connect Call was answered by the facsimile machine no ans No Answer 136 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS 7 3 12 Fax Call Statistics Clear The Fax Call Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the Fax Call Statistics Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 4 System Reports System Report Clear Fax Call Report Clear May I clear a fax call report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Fax Call Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding SYSTEM MA
51. follows 535 The first 4 letters of the owner s last 535 name are name 536 Mailbox number entry failure 536 Check the mailbox number 537 The message is message 537 538 The message sender is unknown 518 538 539 The prompt is now turned off mode 539 540 The system reserved mailbox cannot 540 be edited 541 There are number 541 43 542 There are no messages 542 543 There was 1 unsuccessful attempt to 543 enter this mailbox 544 There were number of failure 544 809 545 These are the brief segments of your 545 Message 546 THIRD 546 547 Third telephone number is telephone 547 number 548 Third telephone number is not 548 assigned 549 THIRTEEN 549 298 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 550 THIRTEEN HOUR 550 551 THIRTEEN MINUTE 551 552 THIRTEENTH 552 553 THIRTIETH 553 554 THIRTY 554 555 THIRTY MINUTE 555 556 THIRTY EIGHT 556 557 THIRTY EIGHT MINUTE 557 558 THIRTY FIRST 558 559 THIRTY FIVE 559 560 THIRTY FIVE MINUTE 560 561 THIRTY FOUR 561 562 THIRTY FOUR MINUTE 562 563 THIRTY NINE 563 564 THIRTY NINE MINUTE 564 565 THIRTY ONE 565 566 THIRTY ONE MINUTE 566 567 THIRTY SEVEN 567 568 THIRTY SEVEN MINUTE 568 569 THIRTY SIX 569 570 THIRTY SIX
52. press 4 637 636 634 743 628 744 To set up mailbox press 1 744 To set class of service press 2 To set the clock press 3 745 To set up message waiting 745 notification press 2 752 745 652 742 699 670 746 To skip setting the password press 120 746 the hash sign 152 746 747 To skip setting the password press 120 747 the pound sign 153 747 748 To skip to the next question press 2 627 748 749 689 644 748 749 689 681 748 749 689 748 749 689 749 To skip to the previous question press 627 748 749 689 3 644 748 749 689 681 748 749 689 748 749 689 750 To skip press 2 647 750 757 751 To specify the mailbox range press 1 751 727 751 650 752 To transfer General Delivery Mailbox 752 745 652 742 699 670 messages press 1 753 To transfer this message press 7 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 706 679 753 208 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 754 To transfer with comment press 2 755 754 610 730 755 To transfer press 1 755 610 730 755 754 610 730 756 To try again press X 619 645 756 505 756 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 313 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
53. to change the current time 5 Type the current time and Press Note Press 0 for help For example to enter 5 o clock press 5 and or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 6 Press 1 for AM or for 2 PM Note If 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in B6 5 Prompt Setting this selection cannot be done 7 Press 2 to accept the time 8 Press 1 to change the current date 9 Type the current month and Press Note Press 0 for help For example to enter January press 1 and 10 Type the day and Press 1t 250 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDB C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK 11 Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press 12 Press 2 to accept the date SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 251 C5 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS C5 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS Eight System Reports can be generated to help monitor the VPS operating status The reports are sent from the RS 232C port to either a printer or a terminal The System Administrator is also able to output System Reports Obtaining System Reports 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 for the System Report Menu 3 Press 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 to obtain the desired report 1 System Service Report 2 Flash Memory Usage Report 3 Port Usage Report 4 Mailbox Usage Report 5 Mailbox Parameter Report 6 Call Account Report 7 Class of Ser
54. 1 268 711 690 268 711 690 275 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 648 201 210 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 712 To record a message for external 712 delivery press 1 To check external delivery message status press 2 To set up mailing list press 3 713 To record a message press 1 713 To add new mailbox number press 2 To review the mailing list press 3 714 To record a new prompt press 1 714 680 757 715 To record the question press 1 715 To set the answer length press 2 To erase the question press 3 716 To record press 1 716 To erase press 2 717 To repeat this message press 1 717 725 670 717 725 734 683 670 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 706 679 753 208 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 718 To repeat this name press 3 602 213 718 671 719 To repeat this schedule press 3 728 707 719 709 707 719 709 720 To repeat press 720 670 720 392 721 To repeat press 3 647 603 721 310 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 722 To replay the previous message 722 information press 1 To play the next message s informa
55. 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 for the System Report Menu 3 Press 2 to clear the Flash Memory Usage Reports 3 to clear the Port Usage Reports 4 to clear the Mailbox Usage Reports or 8 to clear the Fax Call Report 4 Press 2 to clear the report To clear the Mailbox Usage Reports go to the Step 5 5 Type the mailbox number of the start of the range Note If a is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers e g for 3 digit mailbox numbers reports for all mailboxes will be cleared and the System Report Menu will appear In this case Step 6 can be skipped 6 Press 1 to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the range Press 2 to clear all Mailbox Usage Reports SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 253 DELIVERING MESSAGES C6 DELIVERING MESSAGES There are 2 methods of delivering messages The distributions of each message can also be checked Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes Broadcasting Messages An identical message can be delivered to all VPS Subscribers at the same time This procedure is referred to as Broadcasting Messages The message to be broadcast is recorded in the System Manager s mailbox This feature is useful when informing Subscribers about the current VPS status such as remaining flash memory capacity requesting that unnecessary messages be erased etc Log in the Main Menu N Press 2 to deliver a message Ge
56. 232C interface port Environmental Requirements 0 40 C 10 90 96 relative humidity Power Source 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption Approx 10 W Dimensions x W x D 173 318 x 65 mm Mass Weight Approx 1 2 kg SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 141 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS 142 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Appendix SYSTEM FEATURES SYSTEM FEATURES 143 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES The Voice Processing System has many features that are available to the system administrator the system manager and or system subscribers The tables on the following pages list and briefly describe each key VPS system feature In addition references to specific sections of this manual and the Subscriber Guide are provided in the reference column that pertains to each feature listed The specific procedure steps required to initiate access or utilise each feature are detailed at these reference points Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Alternate Extension a group of extensions which require a See Dialing Parameters in Group different call transfer sequence than normal 3 2 4 PBX Interface into a separate group Parameters e See Alternate Extension Assignment in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Alternate Extension Group in Glossary APT Integration is the interface data link that permits cert
57. 362 363 NINETY TWO 363 364 NINTH 364 365 No answer greeting is message 365 366 No answer greeting is not recorded 366 367 No external delivery message 367 pending 368 No letters have been specified 368 369 No messages to verify 369 290 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 370 No more messages 370 371 No one specified by this number 371 372 No previous message 372 373 No question recorded 373 374 NOVEMBER 374 375 O CLOCK 375 376 OCTOBER 376 3T of company name 592 377 378 Old message 378 379 on date 158 379 17 380 ONE 380 381 ONE HOUR 381 382 ONE MINUTE 382 383 One attempt was busy 383 384 One attempt was no answer 384 385 One attempt was successful 385 386 One message to verify 386 387 One other person is queing 387 388 Only extension call is available 499 388 415 389 Operator transfer disabled 389 390 Operator transfer enabled 390 391 number other people are queing 391 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 291 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 392 Otherwise press 2 676 392 697 392 532 647 39
58. 592 This message is from name name 379 on date 377 of company name 17 at time 157 External delivery message for name 161 External delivery message will be sent to 815 was erased name 447 right away 24 because message retention time expired 324 Message to name 272 I ll redial number 31 being delivered now 337 more times MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 319 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Message Waiting Notification Table 83 411 Please enter your callback number 411 Please enter your callback number 822 You can enter up to number 822 You can enter up to number 82 digits 82 digits 820 When you are finished hang up stay on the line to confirm or change your number 575 This call is for name 247 from name Interview Mailbox Management Table 84 14 Answer length is number 454 seconds Fax Management Table 85 824 You have number 764 Transferred number 164 FAX messages 600 times 320 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Glossary Alternate Extension Group Transfers the call coming into the extensions in this group following the sequence specified by Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence APT Integration Digital Integration between the KX TA series telephone system and the VPS Auto Configuration Available with APT DPT Integration only The VPS can automatically draw information fr
59. 7 below will depend upon the length of the recorded messages 4 User Prompts 1 Modified prompts Modifications to default settings 5 User Prompts 2 Modified prompts Modifications to default settings 6 Custom Service Menu Customer service recordings 7 Personal Greetings Subscriber greetings 1 Type SAVE then Press RETURN SAVE VPS Flash Memory Data Save VPS PC Xmodem 1 Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 Custom Service Menu 7 Personal Greetings Select No 2 Select item to be backed up then Press RETURN The size of the file will be displayed To start press RETURN 3 Press RETURN SAVE Start 4 Perform a Standard File Transfer Set the data terminal to the receiving Answer mode Xmodem and specify the backup filename The specified data will be transmitted to the data terminal Note The data terminal used must be equipped with communications software that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol The command can be cancelled by Typing before entering 120 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS the receiving mode Once the receiving mode has been selected use the cancel command of the communication software being used 7 2 8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS LOAD This command is used to install new data or to restore saved data to the VPS T
60. ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 62 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Intercom Up to 12 digits con Specifies the intercom paging sequence required by Paging sisting of 0 9 the PBX It can be programmed using up to 12 of the Sequence and special codes following 8 letters and 12 dial codes FXW D Disconnecting F Hook Flash R Ringback Tone Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 s X Pager Dialling Answer 1 9 0 X Dial Codes Release for Up to 12 digits con Specifies the intercom paging release code required by Intercom sisting of 0 9 x the PBX It can be programmed using up to 12 of the 8 Paging and special codes letters and 12 dial codes as specified above F No Answer 1 30 s When there is no answer this parameter specifies the Time for 5 length of time in seconds the VPS must wait before Intercom concluding Intercom Paging Paging The VPS will return to the caller if the paged party does not respond before this timer expires Announcement 1 3 times Specifies the number of times the intercom page will Repeat Cycle 1 be announced Example I have a call for mailbox owner s name Intercom 1 10 times Specifies the number of times paging will be retried Paging Retry 2 when the paging destination is busy or if there is no answer Note This setting applies when the subscriber has
61. Auto Attend Auto Attend PORT 2 Auto Attend Auto Attend A Auto Attend V Voice Mail S Next Screen Auto Attend using Custom 1 Voice Mail using Custom 2 Incoming Call Services for all ports Day Night can be defined by this setting Default values for all ports Day Night are Automated Attendant Service Custom 1 To select other incoming call services go to Setting Ports 6 Password Setting Screen output Quick Setup Password Setting System Administrator Password Maximum 8 characters NEW PASSWORD VERIFICATION System Reset Clear Password Maximum 8 characters NEW PASSWORD VERIFICATION You can assign the System Administrator Password and System Reset Clear Password in this screen if necessary To go to the next screen without assigning the password Press ENTER 7 Date and Time Setting Screen output Quick Setup Time Setting Current time is 3 04 PM Enter new time HH MM AM PM Current date is SAT 1 JAN 1994 Enter new date DD MM YY Enter the time hour minute in 2 digits comma and A or P and date day month and year in 2 digits To go to the next screen Press ENTER 80 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 1 STARTING UP 8 Activating the Quick Setup Screen output Quick Setup Setup To set up the mailbox and restart select Yes To cancel and exit select No 1 Yes 2 No To activate the Quick
62. COMMANDS 166 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Voice Mail Service permits a caller non subscriber to leave a e See 5 2 6 Voice Mail message in any mailbox See BA SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE See Voice Mail in Glossary Voice Prompts are announcements that instruct the caller e See6 1 4 Customising User Prompts Enter 6 998 5 6 There are 3 kinds of voice prompts See Prompt Mode in Table 36 1 System Prompts recorded at the factory and 37 in B3 SYSTEM in English ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS e See B6 5 Prompt Setting SeeC3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Recording User Prompts inD6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Voice Prompt in Glossary 2 User 1 Prompts not recorded and 3 User 2 Prompts not recorded SYSTEM FEATURES 167 Al SYSTEM FEATURES 168 SYSTEM FEATURES Appendix SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 169 SYSTEM NAVIGATION B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION System Administration which includes the setting and changing of system parameters is performed using an RS 232C ASCII or VT terminal This can be a personal computer with emulation software Keyboard Use Menu options are chosen by Typing the number of the option desired and Pressing RETURN Table 32
63. Distribution List number can be designed so that any subscriber can Press 2 to deliver a message then enter the list number which is 250 in this example The message is delivered to all specified mailboxes Option B For outside messages The System Group Distribution List number can be designed as custom greeting for incoming callers For instance the greeting might be To leave a message for the parts section press 3 The digit 3 would be assigned to System Group Distribution List number 250 in Custom Service Setting Each message waiting lamp will remain on until the message is cleared from the individual station 5 2 8 Extension Groups An extension group places several extensions into the same mailbox These extensions may be assembled into a list called a Extension Group List The extensions in the group list cannot have a personal mailbox When a message is left in this mailbox it lights all of the message waiting lamps of the phones that are in this group list There are 20 group lists available and each group list can have up to 20 entries each When a message is left for the extension group it will light the message waiting lamps on each phone The first person that retrieves the call cancels the message waiting lamp on the other phones Extension groups work well in areas where the call would not be intended for a specific person for example a parts centre or a technical support group CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
64. FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX A FTX FIX A Sequence A A A A Extension FX A FTX FIX FTX FTX FIX FTX FIX A Transfer A A A A Sequence Alternate FX A FTX FIX FTX FTX FTX FTX FIX A Extension A A A A Transfer Sequence Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on Busy Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on No Answer Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on Refuse Call Light On N A T701X T 91X Tx9X T701X T701X T701X Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp Light Off N A T702X T 90X T 9X T700X T700X 702 Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp Call Waiting N A 1 N A N A 2 1 2 Sequence INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 47 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Table 12 PBX Type Other T308 T1232 T96 T336 TD816 TD308 series Manufacturers T616 1232 612 Release Sequence for Call Waiting Check with manufacturer N A Not Available A Adding A for answer to the operator and extension transfer eliminates the message You have a call when the AA transfers a call The VPS disconnects after line is answered Adding D for disconnect creates a blind transfer 3 3 2 KX TA series Programming for Inband Integrati
65. HARDWARE SETTINGS For System Administration system setup mailbox setup and system diagnosis an RS 232C terminal must be connected to the serial interface of the VPS System Administration Top Menu 1 6 B7 1 RS 232C Parameters To the RS 232C Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 1 Table 65 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Baud Rate 300 bps 600 bps 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 9600 Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred bits per second Word Bit Length 1 7 bits 2 8 bits 8 Defines the number of bits in each byte or character Parity None Odd Even None Specifies the parity used for error detection Stop Bit Length 1 bit 2 bits 1 Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte 228 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS B7 2 Port Setting To select Port Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 2 Port Setting Menu To select the Port Setting Menu for Port 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 2 1 Table 66 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Flash Time 1 100 ms Speci
66. I Inband integration 154 Incomplete call handling service 154 Initializing the system 112 Intercom paging 155 Interview service 156 L Live call screening 157 Logical extension 158 M Mailbox 158 Message delivery status 159 Message delivery internal 158 Message management 14 104 Message managers guide 259 Message reception mode 159 Messagescan 159 Message transfer 160 Message waiting notification device 160 Message waiting notification lamp 161 Multilingual service 161 N No answer coverage mode 162 Operator service 162 Pager calling a beeper pager 148 PBX integration 162 Personal greeting for Caller ID 163 Personal greetings 163 Play system prompt after personal greeting 164 Port service 164 Private message 164 Q Quick setup 74 75 126 R Receive message 164 Rotary telephone service 164 332 Index 5 Service access commands 165 Special feature authorisation 165 Specifications 19 141 System administration 14 System administrator s guide 169 System clock 165 System components 15 System management 14 System manager s guide 239 System reports 165 T Time service 166 Troubleshooting 138 Trunk service 166 Two way recording 166 Two way transfer 166 U Utility commands 166 V Voice mail service 167 Voice prompts 167 333 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright
67. Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TA series or KX TD series telephone system Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language used for voice prompts played for 2 User 1 the Subscriber during a Message Waiting Notification 3 User 2 Call and Subscriber Service User 1 Note If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode but not recorded by the Message Manager the VPS will automatically play the factory recorded System Prompts in English By default User 1 and User 2 Prompts are not recorded Number of 0 30 Specifies the maximum number of Caller IDs which CIDs for Caller 30 Subscribers can assign for the Personal Caller Name Name Announcement Announcement Personal 1 Yes If set to Yes Subscribers can utilise the personal Greeting for 2 No greeting feature for Caller ID CID Yes Caller ID 1 Yes If set to Yes Subscribers can utilise the Caller ID Screening 2 No Screening feature Yes SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 183 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table 36 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Authorisation 1 Yes If set to Yes Subscribers are able to utilise the Message for Message 2 No Waiting Notification feature The sub parameters to be Notification No set include Beeper Callback No Entry Mode MWL Notification for Unreceived Message and Device Notification for Unreceived Message If set to No sub para
68. KEY FUNCTIONS 1 9 then Typing any number 1 through 9 will select RETURN the corresponding option for that number Pressing RETURN will select the number entered 9 Exits the current screen and returns to the previous step within the menu Backspace Used to correct any mis typed entry Using the Interface Programming Guidance Each parameter is accessed through a series of menu screens The Programming Menu Structure Diagram on the following page depicts this menu flow A menu flow is shown at the beginning of each section The menu flow corresponds to the Programming Menu Structure Diagram on the following pages This flow is designed to guide the user through the appropriate menus to the parameter to be setup or changed The following example illustrates how the menu flow is used Example System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 1 1 Press 1 at the System Administration Top Menu Press RETURN 2 Press 4 at the Program Menu Press RETURN 3 Press 1 at the Service Setting Menu Press RETURN 4 Press 1 on the Automated Attendant Menu to select 1 Department Dialing when selected 5 Press RETURN Auto Attn Department Dialing Menu will be displayed on the terminal 170 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE SYSTEM NAVIGATION Mallbox 1 Program Setting 2 Class of Service 3 Port Trunk Service 4 Servic
69. MAILBOXES Table 35 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default No Answer 2 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Delay Time 30 a no answer condition is received before making a notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 Time Frame 1 2 1 12 h Specifies the daily schedule for the Message Waiting 00 59 min Notification service for 1 week for this device AM PM a m p m Note These parameters are active only when Use X All Day Mode is set to Scheduled Space No Use No Use Deleting a Mailbox When a mailbox is deleted the Voice Processing System erases all messages in the mailbox removes the mailbox from all group distribution lists deletes the personal group distribution lists assigned to the mailbox erases the Subscriber s name and cancels all external delivery messages To access the proper menu for Deleting a Mailbox follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 2 Mailbox No Resetting a Mailbox Password The parameters for clearing a mailbox password are set using this procedure To access the proper menu for clearing a mailbox password follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 3 Mailbox No Listing Mailboxes The mailbox number list is displayed using this procedure 178 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES To displa
70. MINUTE 570 571 THIRTY THREE 571 572 THIRTY THREE MINUTE 572 573 THIRTY TWO 573 574 THIRTY TWO MINUTE 574 575 This call is for name 575 575 247 576 This call is from name 576 577 This caller ID number already exists 577 578 This device is for continuous use 578 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 299 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 579 This device is for scheduled use 579 580 This device is not to be used 580 581 This group has no members 581 582 This is a new mailbox 582 583 This is for message manager 51 583 584 This is for system manager 51 584 585 This is the General Delivery Mailbox 585 586 This is the last message 586 587 This is the last prompt number 587 588 This is your mailbox 588 589 This is your message 518 589 590 This list member already exists 590 591 This mailbox number is already 591 assigned 592 This message is from name 592 377 592 593 This message is from the general 518 593 delivery mailbox 594 This message will be delivered on 594 17 day 595 THREE 595 596 THREE HOUR 596 597 THREE MINUTE 597 598 THURSDAY 598 599 Time is time 599 600 times 764 600 601 To accept the prompt press 2 732 601 678 677 602 To accept press 1 602 21
71. Menu Access the Custom Service Setting Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 2 1 Program Enter The Number 4 Service Settings Enter The Number 2 2 Custom Service The system then asks what Custom Service number you want to edit Enter the desired number 1 100 The Custom Service screen is displayed Program Service Setting Custom Service Setting Custom 1 Not recorded 1 Description 2 Prompt Mode System 1 System 2 User1 3 User2 3 Menu Repeat Cycle 3 1 3 times 4 Call Transfer Anytime Extn Extn Mbx No 5 Wait for Second Digit 1 5 s 6 No Input Operation c a f a Transfer to Mailbox b Transfer to Extension c Operator d Exit e Previous Menu f Custom Service Select Operation 7 Keypad Assignment Keypad 0 a Transfer to Mailbox h Call Transfer Service b Transfer to Extension i Subscriber Service c Operator j Department Dialing d Exit k Dial by Name e Previous Menu 1 Repeat Menu f Custom Service m Main Menu g Voice Mail Service n Fax Transfer CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 85 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Enter data into the Custom Service menu use the table below as a guide Table 19 Description Value Range Description Function Default Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language that the caller will hear when 2 User 1 calling this Custo
72. Message caller is disconnected from the VPS after hearing Thank you for calling Next Operator caller is transferred to the next operator Operator 2 or 3 extension 1 Assignable for Operator 1 2 and 3 2 Assignable for Operator 1 and 2 Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE No Answer specifies how calls are answered on See No Answer Coverage Coverage Mode Operator 1 2 or 3 when they are not Mode in Table 22 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See No Answer Coverage Mode in Table 41 42 and 43 in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters Operator Service permits callers to request a live operator by pressing 0 on the telephone keypad Up to 3 operators can be specified to receive calls in the Day Night Lunch and Break Modes See 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See Operator s Parameters in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Operator s Extensions in D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX PBX Integration allows the VPS and PBX to work together as an integrated unit Three integration options are available Inband Integration APT Integration and DPT Integration See 2 7 CONNECTIONS See Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS See Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 162 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES This feature can be enabled or disabled in
73. Message Waiting Notification 2 00 59 min The schedule is only used when Use Device is set to MON SUN AM PM am pm Scheduled Day Space No Use CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 99 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES 5 5 3 Deleting a Mailbox From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 2 Program Mailbox Setting Delete Enter the Mailbox Number Are you sure Y N 5 5 4 Password Reset To reset a subscriber s password go to the Password Reset Menu Enter the Mailbox Number appears on the screen Enter the mailbox number you wish to reset Enter the Mailbox Number appears again Enter a new number if you wish to reset more than one password From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 3 Program Mailbox Setting Password Reset Enter the Mailbox Number Enter the Mailbox Number 5 5 5 Mailbox Listing This listing is a report of mailbox number assignments From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 4 Program Mailbox Setting Mailbox Listing 1 201 2 203 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 100 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRI
74. None english service N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A Service 2 V M Service 3 FAX Transfer x Subscriber 2 Custom 2 User 1 Access 2 Menu Msg None 2 Spanish service N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A Service 2 V M Service 3 FAX Transfer x Subscriber 3 3 Custom 3 User 2 Access 3 Menu Msg None lt vietnamese service gt N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A Service 2 V M Service 3 FAX Transfer x Exit 4 Dept Dial 5 Repeat Menu x Exit Main Menu Custom 100 System Access 9 Menu Msg None N Xfer Mbx 998 1 Custom 1 2 Custom 2 3 Custom 3 Indicates that Custom Service No is 100 Indicates that System prompts are active Indicates that this Custom Service was accessed 9 times by callers This counter can be cleared See 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR Indicates that the menu message for this Custom Service is None not recorded If menu message is recorded Rec will appear Caller will be sent to General Delivery Mailbox GDM if he dials nothing Custom Service 1 will play when the 1 key is pressed Custom Service 2 will play when the 2 key is pressed Custom Service 3 will play when the 3 key is pressed SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOT
75. PT connect Processing Processing PT connect disposition Error Not Exist DSP Card is not loaded LMON CONo Status 1 Ready 2 Ready DTMF Information Display PUTD This command is used to display the DTMF tones the VPS receives and sends In addition to the DTMF tones the following are displayed the Incoming Call Service Voice Mail Automated Attendant Custom and Interview entered by the caller and the time periods that the ports are enabled Type PUTD The VPS will remain in this mode until PUTD is entered again The default setting for this mode for all ports is OFF PUTD Target Port To change the mode from PUTD to OFF Type PUTD again PUTD Target Port 00 Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting Note means enable for the port 0 means disable for the port To set the mode for only 1 port Type PUTD and the port number SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 127 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS PUTD I Target Port 0 Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting Sample display PUTD Target Port for Debug Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting 1 DTMFE 3 1 DTME 8 1 A Attend 1 DTMF 1 DTMF 6 1 Voice Mail 1 DTMFE 1 1 DTMF 0 1 DTMFE 1 1 NonSub Svc 1 1 DTMF 1 DTMF 9 1 Thank you WARNING PUTD is a command originally used when troubleshooting D
76. Press 2 to accept it Total Message Time 10 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current time b Type the total message time 5 100 min c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Retrieval Order 11 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current order LIFO or FIFO b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Scanning with Information 12 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting Status 13 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Call Waiting on Busy Status 14 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it 246 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Message Cancel for Live Call Screening 15 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Direct Mailbox Access Status 16 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Intercom Pa
77. Private Hands Free Mode Assignment See 4 4 4 Live Call Screening Button Assignment See 4 4 5 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment See 4 4 6 Live Call Screening Password Assignment See 4 4 7 Live Call Screening Password Cancellation See 4 4 8 Live Call Screening Password Control See Message Cancel for Live Call Screening in Table 36 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Live Call Screening in Glossary See 4 13 Live Call Screening in the Subscriber s Guide SYSTEM FEATURES 157 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox is an extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox This feature is used by subscribers that are often unavailable or that do not have a telephone See All Calls Transfer to Mailbox in Table 34 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Creating and Editing a Mailbox 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See Logical Extension in Glossary Mailbox is a place where all messages to a subscriber are stored Several mailbox options exist Subscriber Mailbox Interview Mailbox System Manager s Mailbox Message Manager s Mailbox and General Delivery Mailbox See 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES See 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See 7 3 1 Mailbox Assignments Se
78. Processing The VPS handles incoming and outgoing calls When a call comes in it answers forwards to appropriate extensions takes and stores messages and notifies subscribers when messages are left Subscribers may send and transfer messages to other subscribers within the system The VPS is easy to use helping callers through the system with step by step voice prompts Unlike handwritten messages or those left with answering services VPS messages are confidential they are stored in a mailbox and retrieved only with the subscriber s password Other advantages of the VPS are clarity and accuracy which are commonly lacking with written messages The messages come directly from the caller in the caller s own voice To further ensure accuracy the system allows the sender to correct or change messages before saving them Messages can be erased or transferred by the recipient 1 1 2 Basic Operations Greeting Callers Callers are greeted by a prerecorded message that includes directions for leaving and editing messages The VPS can list single digit numbers for each available extension or mailbox Callers who know the extension of the person they wish to reach may dial the extension number at any time Callers with rotary phones are transferred to a pre programmed destination which is often an operator or the General Delivery Mailbox to leave a message Sending Messages Callers can review and edit messages before leaving them in a mailb
79. Prompts 2 User 1 Prompts and 3 User 2 Prompts Generally the System Prompts should be left alone they are recorded by the factory in English However User 1 and User 2 Prompts can be recorded by the Message Manager in any language she wishes The Multilingual Selection Menu maximum length 6 min With this menu callers can select the language they prefer to hear all prompts mentioned in the previous paragraph The User Prompts For example the Message Manager can record a menu like this For English press 1 For Spanish press 2 For Chinese press 3 The System Caller Names maximum length 4 s each Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be registered by the System Administrator A name should be recorded for each Caller ID number this is a task for the Message Manager Recording Menus and Voice Labels 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 to modify messages 3 Select the desired number to be recorded 3 Record the Department Dialling Menu 4 Record the Custom Service Menus MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 269 D6 RECORDING MESSAGES 5 Record the Voice Labels for System Group Distribution Lists 7 Record the Multilingual Selection Menu 4 For the item selected in Step 3 follow these steps For the Department Dialling Menu Go to Step 5 e For the Custom Service Menus Enter a Custom Service Number 1 100 Enter 0 to record the Custom Service exit prompt For the Voice Labels
80. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table 36 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Device 1 Yes When this parameter has been set to Yes and when Notification for 2 No unplayed messages remain the system calls the Unreceived No appropriate device in numerical order until all unplayed Message messages are received Authorisation 1 Yes When set to Yes Subscribers are able to utilise the for External 2 No External Message Delivery feature The sub parameter Message No to be set is Prompt Mode If set to No sub parameter Delivery cannot be assigned Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language to be used for voice prompts 2 User 1 3 User 2 4 Selective User 1 Authorisation 1 Yes When set to Yes messages that have not been accessed for Auto 2 No for a specific length of time are forwarded automatically Forwarding No to another mailbox The sub parameters to be set for this feature include Mailbox Number Delay Time and Forwarding Mode If set to No sub parameters cannot be assigned Mailbox 2 5 digits Specifies the mailbox where forwarded messages are to Number None be sent Note System Group Distribution List numbers and mailbox numbers for System Manager and Message Manager cannot be used for this parameter Delay Time h min Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the 00 05 t
81. Sum Error ROM checksum error FLASH MEMORY ERROR initialise Flash Memory initialisation error Error FLASH MEMORY ERROR No No system Flash Memory present System FLASH MEMORY ERROR Program Program could not be loaded from system Flash Load Error Memory FLASH MEMORY ERROR Program Checksum error in program loaded from system Sum Error Flash Memory FLASH MEMORY ERROR System Error Loading of administrator data from system Data Error Flash Memory SYSTEM ERROR 1 Administrator data error 118 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Table 27 SYSTEM ERROR 2 Error loading of report data SYSTEM ERROR 3 Clock error SYSTEM ERROR 4 Mailbox data error SYSTEM ERROR 5 Message data error 1 SYSTEM ERROR 6 Message data error 2 SYSTEM ERROR 7 Error loading of control data SYSTEM ERROR 8 Error loading of voice prompt data SYSTEM ERROR 9 Error loading of MWL control data SYSTEM ERROR 10 Error loading of flash memory identify data SYSTEM ERROR 11 Error writing of VBI chain data SYSTEM ERROR 12 Error writing of BLK chain data SYSTEM ERROR 13 Error loading of user prompt modify data SYSTEM ERROR 14 Error loading of Class of Service data No CO lines are active No Port cards present COs are all disabled All Ports are malfunctioning APT DPT Interface Connection is not Established Ports ar
82. The flash memory capacity of the KX TVP50 can be increased from 2 h to 4 h if an optional expansion memory card 52 is installed 2 6 2 Installing the KX TVP52 1 Disconnect the station wire s Wait a few minutes then disconnect the AC cord from the VPS 2 Take out the screw 3 Remove the cover by pressing both tabs and lifting up TV PSD rn 4 Take out the screws and remove the metal bar Screws F C iy e e Metal Bar 3l INSTALLATION 2 6 INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL EXPANSION MEMORY CARD KX TVP52 5 Attach the optional expansion memory card firmly Secure the screw SLAVE o CAUTION Do not attach the optional expansion memory card at the MASTER position Attach it at the SLAVE position 6 Replace the metal bar and secure the screws Screws Y 7 Replace the cover and secure the screw 8 Connect the AC cord again 32 INSTALLATION 2 7 CONNECTIONS 2 7 CONNECTIONS 2 7 Connecting to the PBX The 50 can be connected to up to 2 extension ports of the PBX Use a 4 conductor wire for connection with KX TA systems that uses APT Integration and for connection with KX TD systems that use D
83. This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd KME You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model Except above you may not reproduce this manual in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of KME 2000 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan PSQX2195ZA KK1000CMO
84. a message Press X to erase the recorded prompt and exit Go to Step 7g g The VPS plays the next prompt number h Record other prompts by repeating Steps 7d through 7g Note User prompts be saved in a personal computer command SAVE through the RS 232C Once they have been saved they can be restored with the command LOAD at any time The list of modifiable prompts and prompt numbers are located at the end of this section Recording System Caller Names 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 to modify messages 3 Press 8 to modify system caller names 4 Enter the Caller ID List Number 1 120 to be modified Note Enter X to return to Step 3 To record system caller names first Caller ID numbers must be assigned see B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement 5 The VPS plays the Caller ID number and its name To change the name Press 1 If a name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number go to Step 6 Note Press 2 to accept the current name Return to Step 4 Press 3 to erase the current name Return to Step 4 6 Record the name at the tone and Press 1 7 The VPS plays the recorded name Press 2 to accept it Note Press 1 to change the recorded name Return to Step 6 Press 3 to erase the recorded name Return to Step 4 Guidance is Caller Name Announcement number 2 12 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D6 RECORDING MESSAGES 8 Record names f
85. and control message waiting lamps on extensions The procedure for verifying the correct code sequences for non Panasonic KX T series telephone systems is to manually execute the sequences from a single line telephone SLT with the PBX To select Dialing Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 1 67 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default PBX Type 1 Other Manufacturers Specifies the type of PBX connected to the VPS In 2 KX T Series the case of a Panasonic KX T series telephone 1 T308 T616 system the model number should also be specified 2 T1232 3 T96 Note The Dialing Parameters are set automatically to 4 T336 each PBX default value after selecting the PBX type 5 TD816 TD1232 TD612 6 TD308 7 TA series TD816 TD1232 TD612 230 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table 68 PBX Type Other Manufacturers KX T series T308 T616 T1232 T96 TD816 1232 T336 308 612 series Integration Mode None Inband None None None None None None Inband Inband DPT Inband Inband Inband Operator Transfer Sequence FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX Extension Transfer Sequence FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence FX F
86. and ends when Day Service starts There are 3 periods for Break Service Break 1 Service Break 2 Service and Break 3 Service Port Assignment Trunk Group Assignment and Operator Parameters can be programmed for each mode Note Break Service and Lunch Service are only available when they are in Day Service period If Break 3 Service is out of Day Service period for example Break 3 Service does not work To access the proper menu for Time Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 Time Service Day Service To access the proper menu for Day Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 1 Table 49 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End times of the Day Service Start End 00 59 min AM PM a m p m Day Mode 24 h Day Mode Sun D Day Mode Night Mode 24 h Night Mode Start End N Night Mode MON SUN 9 00 AM 5 00 PM SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 209 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Time Service Lunch Service To access the proper menu for Lunch Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 Table 50 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End times of the Lunch Start End 00 59 min Service AM P
87. extension number 144 145 Enter the owner s extension number 145 146 Enter the prompt number 146 147 Enter the telephone number and wait 147 To insert a pause or special command enter the partial number and wait for the options menu 148 Enter the time followed by the hash 148 208 sign 148 664 208 149 Enter the time followed by the pound 149 208 sign 149 665 208 150 Enter the total message time available 150 per mailbox Valid entries are from 5 to 100 minutes 151 Enter your party s mailbox number 151 675 151 674 152 Enter your password followed by the 152 hash sign 152 746 153 Enter your password followed by the 153 pound sign 153 747 154 erased 52 154 61 154 155 Extension extention number 155 156 Extension number extention 156 number 157 External delivery message for name 157 815 24 158 External delivery message scheduled 158 379 17 for name 159 External delivery message scheduled 159 17 on date 160 External delivery message will be 160 sent right away 161 External delivery message will be 161 447 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 281 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 162 External message delivery disabled 162 163 Ex
88. extension should assign a Voice Mail extension from the VPS which contains its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice Mail Transfer DO NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS For example if jack 06 extension 106 has its mailbox in the VPSI assign extension 107 or 108 as the destination not extension 115 or 116 see diagram below 2 Change the extension numbers of both VPS port 1 and 2 for VPS2 from 107 and 108 to 115 and 116 see Extension Number of VPS Port 1 and Extension Number of VPS Port 2 in Table 69 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters s 2 Extension 106 KX TVP50 VPS1 Port 1 Extension 107 Port 2 Extension 108 Port 1 Extension 115 Port 2 Extension 116 TEST Press the INTERCOM button and then 107 If the VPS answers you have an APT connection Set the DIP switch to position 0 after initialisation is complete The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX TA series should be able to communicate through Digital Integration When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the station information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 59 4 3 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 4 5 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD81
89. if incoming call service is set to Interview or Custom If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below 92 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 3 SETTING PORTS Table 21 Description Value Range Description Function Default Prompt for 1 System Specifies in which language rotary callers hear the voice Rotary Callers User 1 prompts when they cannot enter any digit to select a Prompt Selection Number while Multilingual Selection 3 User 2 Menu message is being played System Delayed 0 15 s Specifies whether the port answers immediately 0 in Answer Time 0 delay 1 15 s CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 93 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS Automated Attendant parameters include Department Dialling operator parameters and alternate extension If the VPS needs a special transfer procedure for an extension such as modem extension alternate extension should be assigned See Alternate Extension Assignment in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters 5 4 1 Automated Attendant Menu From Top Menu Enter The Numbers 2 1 4 1 Program Service Settings Auto Attn Setting Menu 1 Department Dialing 2 Operator s Parameters 3 Alternate Extension 5 4 2 Department Dialling Department Dialling numbers 1 9 represent department extensions these
90. into System Program 131 and enter the Voice Mail extensions into a hunting group Go into System Program 106 and assign the hunting group to Auto Attendant AA Then go into System Program 813 and assign a floating number to the hunting group 50 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 51 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION 4 11 Why Digital Integration is Important The KX TVP50 works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard single line tip ring telephone interface However the communication between the PBX and VPS is best when Digital Integration is used the KX TVP50 is already set up to communicate through Digital Integration Once Digital Integration is established the PBX sends information to the VPS through the data link This information enables the VPS to identify the extension that is calling know where a call is forwarded and why it s forwarded and recognises what the caller wants to do This communication allows features that are only available with Digital Integration several of which are described below Table 13 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES Auto Configuration The VPS knows what extension numbers exist on the PBX and creates
91. longer needed they must be deleted While another person accesses the VPS the action is automatically cancelled Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for Mailbox Setup 4 Press 2 for Delete 5 Type the mailbox number 6 Press 1 to delete the mailbox Deleting a Mailbox Password When a password is forgotten the password must be deleted by the System Manager before it can be reassigned by the subscriber 1 Log in the Main Menu 242 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for the Mailbox Setup 4 Press 3 for reset Password 5 Type the mailbox number 6 Press 1 to delete the password SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 243 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Class of Service defines the set of VPS services available to Subscribers A maximum of 64 Class of Services can be established Each Class of Service can be set using the telephone COS No 63 and No 64 are assigned to the Message Manager and the System Manager respectively For a complete explanation of COS parameters please see Table 36 and Table 37 in Appendix B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS The Class of Service parameters listed below are set by following the procedure steps listed Personal Greeting Length Length ranges from 8 60 s in 4 s increment
92. menu for Prompt Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 213 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 54 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default System Prompt 1 9 Assigns a selection number 1 9 to each prompt Callers Selection None use the numbers to select the desired language for their Number message prompts This setting is required when either one 7 or both of the following parameters are set to Selective User 1 Prompt Selection Number Port Assignment Incoming Call Service Prompt authorisation of External Message Delivery Prompt User 2 Prompt Mode Selection Dumber Example For service in English press 7 For service in Spanish press 8 For service in Chinese press 9 The Message manager is able to record this Multilingual Selection Menu Note The Prompt Selection Number and the first digit of the mailbox number should be different from each other Position of 1 Before This parameter setting is functional only when User 1 or AM PM 2 After User 2 Prompts are in use This parameter specifies the Time Stamp 3 24 h following After 1 Before the VPS announces AM PM before the time e g PM 3 42 2 After The VPS announces AM PM after the time e g 3 42 PM 3 24 h the VPS announces the time in 24 h format e g 15 42 Note
93. notifies the subscriber that a new message has been received Calling either a specified telephone or beeper pager number makes notification The message is automatically played when a telephone number is called and answered When a beeper pager is called the subscriber must call and access the message from the mailbox Notification can be scheduled either on or off for a maximum of 2 times during any 24 h period The subscriber can program a maximum of 3 telephones or beepers pagers in sequence The VPS will recall the number or number sequence for up to the assigned times until answered Notification is terminated when the subscriber has received the message when the last number has been called the assigned times and at the completion of the programmed time period See Message Waiting Notification from an SLT in 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration See Authorisation for Message Notification in Table 36 and 37 inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See 03 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION See Message Waiting Notification in Glossary See 4 8 Message Waiting Notification in the Subscriber s Guide 160 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Message Waitin
94. numbers are given to the caller in the initial list of prompts Return to Program Service Settings Auto Attn Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Service Settings Auto Attn Setting Department Dialing Menu 1 Department Dialing No 1 202 2 Department Dialing No 2 204 3 Department Dialing No 3 215 4 Department Dialing No 4 236 5 Department Dialing No 5 207 6 Department Dialing No 6 208 7 Department Dialing No 7 209 8 Department Dialing No 8 210 9 Department Dialing No 9 211 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters If you enable operator service you must set the following parameters operator extension and mailbox number coverage modes and message repeat cycle Operator 1 Cannot have a personal mailbox The default is set at 0 KX TA series or 9 KX TD series which coincides with the operator of the PBX When a caller tries to leave a 94 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS message with the Operator 1 the message will automatically go to the General Delivery Mailbox GDM To light Message Waiting Lamp at Operator 1 s extension Assign Mailbox 998 to Operator 1 s extension This will notify Operator 1 of messages left in the GDM Operators 2 and 3 For KX TD816 KX TD1232 and KX TD612 Operators 2 and 3 can be assigned to a floating number that is assigned to a ring group Return to Program Servi
95. of the factory provided system prompts To change the user prompts BW NY Access the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service To modify messages Press 5 To modify the user prompts Press 6 To change user prompt 1 Press 1 to change user prompt 2 Press 2 To change specified prompts Press 1 to change all prompts Press 2 Enter the prompt number you want to change Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process Note Prompt 585 The system prompt is This is the General Delivery Mailbox You can record User Prompt 1 or User Prompt 2 as Thank you for calling ABC company We are currently closed however if you leave your name and phone number we will return your call as quickly as possible FINAL SETUP 105 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES The following steps complete the basic installation of the KX TVP50 system For each mailbox on the system a no answer busy and after hours greeting should be recorded as well as the owner s name and password Please follow the steps below to set up the mailboxes accordingly 6 2 1 Recording Personal Greetings The No Answer Greeting is played whenever the caller enters your mailbox during business hours The Busy Greeting is played when the caller is told your line is busy and then elects to leave a message in your mailbox
96. of the utility commands It lists all utility commands with a brief description of each Immediate Reply Allows the message receiver to reply to a message without specifying the extension number of the sender Inband Signalling The Follow On ID or Called Party ID that integrates the VPS and the telephone switch Uses intercom paths to light message wait light Does not give high end features such as Intercom Paging Direct Mailbox Access Live Call Screening etc Incomplete Call Handling Service Calls are considered incomplete when there is no answer or if the line is busy The Incomplete Call Handling Service can be set for 6 options 1 to record a message from the caller 2 transfer the caller to a covering extension 3 page the mailbox owner via the PBX 4 notify the mailbox owner via beeper pager 5 transfer the caller to the operator or 6 let the caller try another extension Integration Required between the VPS and the telephone switch See Inband signalling APT Integration and DPT Integration Intercept Routing No Answer When a call is not answered it can be transferred to another extension or to the VPS This is a PBX feature Intercom Paging Available with APT DPT Integration only Allows up to 8 different paging groups An external party can reach a subscriber who is away from his her telephone using either internal or external page groups For a Caller ID Caller if his name has been recorded for
97. remain in the mailbox The timing is refreshed whenever 30 the message is played back If 0 Unlimited is selected saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the mailbox owner Message 1 6 min Defines the maximum message length that can be received Length 6 Mailbox 5 100 msgs _ Specifies the maximum number of messages both new and Capacity 100 saved that can be stored in a mailbox Maximum Messages Mailbox 5 100 min Specifies the maximum amount of message time both new Capacity 100 and saved allowable in a mailbox Maximum Message Time Message 1 LIFO Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved Retrieval Order 2 FIFO LIFO 1 LIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent 2 FIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest message Message 1 Yes If set to Yes the system adds the message sender s name Scanning with 2 No and the recording date and time to the message Information No 186 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table 37 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Prompt mode 1 System Specifies the language used for voice prompts 2 User 1 3 User 2 Note If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode but User 1 not recorded by the Message Manager the VPS will automatically play the factory recorde
98. service Holiday Setting Delete Cancels the Holiday Service Setting by specifying a holiday number 1 20 shown To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Delete follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 2 Holiday Setting Listing Used to display all of the specified holiday names and dates shown To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Listing follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 3 B6 4 Daylight Saving Time DST Used to adjust the internal clock of the VPS to the starting and ending date of daylight saving time 212 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS To access the proper menu for Daylight Saving Time follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 4 Table 53 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Start Date End DD Day Specifies the starting and ending dates of daylight Date MM Month saving time The VPS advances 1 h on the starting date None of daylight saving time and restores the time on the ending date Both the starting date and the ending date must be set The same date cannot be used for both settings Note The VPS changes to and from DST at 2 00 AM B6 5 Prompt Setting This setting is required when Multilingual Service is enabled To access the proper
99. settings refer to the PBX manual or customer support office to get the correct values for these settings Flash Time 100 300 600 900 ms The minimum amount of time that the PBX requires to recognise a hookswitch flash Choose the amount that is equal to or greater than the PBX s setting CPC Signal Calling Party Control Signal NONE 6 5 150 300 450 600 ms The amount of time allowed for the short break in loop current that is used to indicate that the caller has hung up usually set to NONE since most PBXs do not provide this signal to single line ports If choosing a setting other than NONE use an amount equal to or less than the PBX or telephone company provided CPC signal e Disconnect Time 1 8 s The amount of time that the line is temporarily unavailable after a call has ended Dial Mode DTMF Pulse 10 pps Pulse 20 pps The type of signalling the PBX single line port expects to receive pps pulses per second INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 43 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters Dialing Parameters PBX Type Specifies the type of PBX which is connected to the VPS Integration Mode Specifies the method of integration to be used between the VPS and PBX If PBX type is set to the Panasonic KX T series the Inband Signalling parameters are set automatically and should not be altered APT Integration is only available when a KX TA series
100. the COS Class of Service settings Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Personal Greeting permits subscribers to record up to 4 personal e See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR for Caller ID APT greetings for calls from pre assigned Caller DIGITAL INTEGRATION DPT Integration ID numbers Each greeting supports up to 8 See Personal Greeting Length Only caller ID numbers and Personal Greeting for CID in Table 36 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Personal Greeting for Caller ID in Glossary See 4 10 Recording Personal Greetings for Caller ID in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 11 Assigning Caller ID Numbers for Personal Greeting for Caller ID in the Subscriber s Guide Personal Greetings permit the subscriber to record the following 3 personal message greetings 1 No Answer played when unavailable to answer the call during business hours 2 Busy Signal played whenever the line is busy 3 After Hours played after hours The No Answer Greeting is also played when the caller accesses the mailbox directly when the Busy Signal or the After Hours Greeting has not been recorded See 6 2 1 Greetings Recording Personal See Personal Greeting Length in Table 36 in SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS
101. the VPS System External Message Delivery Duration Time The maximum time allowed for an external message that is to be delivered by the VPS specified by the System Administrator System Group Distribution List The system can maintain an internal list of twenty mailbox groups Each group can hold twenty mailboxes Each group is referenced by a System Group Distribution List number and is assigned via system administration recording into a System Group Distribution List number will go into the mailboxes of all members of that group System Manager Mailbox 999 The person who can perform very basic and limited system programming using a telephone He can create delete mailboxes clear subscriber passwords when they are forgotten set Class of Service parameters set the system clock and generate System Reports System Report Eight System Reports can be acquired by the System Administrator or System Manager upon request 328 Glossary TIME One of the utility commands It is used to confirm or set the time and date of the VPS Two Way Recording Available with APT DPT Integration only Allows a subscriber to record a conversation into his her mailbox Two Way Transfer Available with APT DPT Integration only Allows a subscriber to record a conversation into another person s mailbox Voice Mail A general term used for messages recorded over the phone from one person to another Voice Prompt Recorded VPS ins
102. with very limited capabilities Because the incoming call is forwarded as an intercom path and not a DIL direct in line the following items will not work time table overflow function DISA message from a DISA card IRNA Integration with the wrong PBX or with certain Key Systems presents limitations to the KX TVP50 s standard functions We do not recommend these systems for integration with the KX TVP50 The section 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible explains problems with compatibility VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 13 1 2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND USE 12 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND USE 1 2 1 System Administration System Administration is accomplished by the installer and is concerned with setting and changing system parameters and diagnosing system problems System Administration is accomplished using terminal emulation software 1 2 2 System Management Two system functions are performed by the customer System Management and Message Management System Management is concerned with changing system parameters through the System Manager s Mailbox Message Management is concerned with recording voice prompts through the Message Manager s Mailbox These messages include Department Dialling menu Custom Service menus voice labels for System Group Distribution Lists user prompts multilingual selection menu and System Caller Names 1 2 3 Subscriber Use System users a
103. 2 651 392 276 392 533 647 392 654 392 720 392 653 392 42 647 392 41 647 392 393 Owner s extension is extention 393 number 394 Owner s extension is not assigned 394 395 Owner s extension number is deleted 395 396 Owner s name erased 396 397 Owner s name is name 397 398 Owner s name is deleted 398 399 Owner s name is not recorded 399 400 Password deleted 400 401 Password entry failure 401 Check the password 402 Password is number 402 403 Password not assigned 403 404 PAUSE 404 405 Personal greeting for caller ID 405 disabled 406 Personal greeting for caller ID 406 enabled 407 Personal greeting length is time 407 454 408 Play system prompt after personal 408 greeting disabled 409 Play system prompt after personal 409 greeting enabled 292 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 410 Please call telephone number 410 411 Please enter your callback number 411 822 82 411 822 82 820 412 Please enter the person s extension 412 675 412 675 202 412 674 412 674 202 413 Please enter the person s mailbox 413 675 number 413 675 618 413 674 413 674 618 414 Please hold while I page the person 414 415 Please in
104. 2 Port Setting Adjust the CPC signal to that of the connected PBX and reset See CPC Signal in Table 66 in 7 2 Port Setting 138 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 74 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Table 29 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Unable to make outside calls Improper setting of the outside call dial mode Improper setting of the outside call dial procedure Reset the outside call dial mode tone pulse properly See Dial Mode in Table 66 in 7 2 Port Setting Reset the outside line access sequence of the connected PBX See Dial Number in Table 35 inB2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES and Number of Digits to Access Outside Line in Table 57 in B6 7 Other Parameters Unable to call an extension Improper setting of extension numbering plan Adjust the extension numbering plan properly See Numbering Plan 1 16 in Table 56 in B6 7 Other Parameters Unable to access the mailbox Improper setting of the mailbox number Check the mailbox number See Mailbox Number in Table 33 inB2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Unable to access to Operator 1 Improper setting of the operator extension number Adjust the operator extension number to that of the connected PBX See Operator s Extension in Table 41 in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters Connected terminal RS 232C port does not operate Improper connect
105. 3 718 671 300 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 603 To accept press 2 732 603 678 614 677 738 603 647 732 603 678 639 733 647 603 661 647 603 682 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 721 647 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 604 To accept press 4 759 760 761 604 605 To accept press 5 759 760 761 696 605 606 To add group members press 2 626 606 626 606 656 731 607 To add more caller ID numbers press 607 2 or press 1 to end 608 To add more digits press 4 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 609 To add more members press 1 609 To end press 2 610 To add new mailbox number press 3 755 610 730 755 754 610 730 611 To add new member press 1 611 611 657 733 612 To add press 1 612 612 660 733 613 To add press 2 647 613 614 To add press 4 732 603 678 614 677 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 301 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
106. 300 series Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX TD series a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode 2 Press 2 for KX TA series or 03 for KX TD series Screen output Ext NO 3 Press the extension number Or press X key to remove all passwords for KX TD series only 4 Press STORE 5 Exit the program mode For KX TA series Set the MEMORY switch to Set on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series For KX TD series Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 4 4 9 Two Way Recording into One s Own Mailbox 4 4 10 This feature allows extension users to record conversations into their own mailboxes by pressing the Two Way Recording TWR button Two Way Recording Button Assignment For the Two Way Recording feature to work at an extension the extension must have a TWR button on it This button must be either a DSS BLF or CO button must have a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign a TWR button on an extension This is a station level program and should be done at each individual phone 1 Enter Station Programming For KX TA series With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX TD series a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PITS PG
107. 30s SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 225 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 63 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Main Fax 2 5 digits Specifies the main fax extension number Extension No None Alternate Fax 2 5 digits Specifies the backup fax extension number used when the Extension No None main fax extension is busy or if there is no answer within the specified Fax No Answer Time When either of these situations occurs the VPS transfers the fax call to the backup extension Fax No Answer 5 60 s Specifies the length of time in seconds the VPS must Time 10 wait before taking other action when there is no answer at either fax extension Note This timer applies to the fax call that has been transferred to the main or alternate fax extension Fax Manager 2 5 digits Specifies the Fax Manager Mailbox Number The VPS Mailbox No None will notify the fax manager of the status of fax calls depending upon the settings of the Fax No Answer Coverage Mode and Fax Notification Mode parameters Fax No Answer 1 No If set to Mbx the VPS will leave the number of Coverage Mode 2 Mbx unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox 3 Ext No Example The FAX transfer situation is as follows One attempt was no answer 1 If set to Ext the VPS will call the Fax Manager s extension to specify the number of unanswered fax calls
108. 5 digits Specifies any vacant extension number No None Note The Extension Group List number can be assigned as The Extension of the Owner of a mailbox This permits all group members to share the information in the mailbox Group Name Up to 16 Allows a group name to be specified If a group name is characters not required press RETURN and specify the mailbox None numbers Any alphanumeric character and space can be used Member 2 5 digits Specifies the extension number belonging to the group 1 20 None Note Members cannot have a personal mailbox Extension Group Delete Permits specified extensions to be deleted from the list shown To access the proper menu for Extension Group Delete follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 2 Group List No Extension Group Listing This parameter displays all Extension Group List numbers as shown To access the proper menu for Extension Group List Numbers follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 3 208 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 2 Time Service Time Service is a timer function that selects the desired call handling method based upon time of day Day Night Lunch and Break Services are available Night Service can be assigned within Day Service parameters Night Service starts when Day Service ends
109. 6 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 Note Do not use system programs 106 131 602 or 813 for DPT Integration The following Section 4 3 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the Manager s Extension is for the KX TD1232 as examples Please refer to them for the KX TD816 and the KX TD612 4 3 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the Manager s Extension It is important that the KX TD1232 has the proper software level to allow Digital Integration with the VPS Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level then complete the required programming before starting up the VPS of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming Refer to the KX TD1232 Installation Manual or Programming Guide for instructions on how to enter the system programming mode Software Verification 1 Verify Software If you are configuring a 2 cabinet system remember to check both cabinets The software must be the same in each Check the software version of the KX TD1232 using System Program 116 Example P241IYMMDDA The underlined digits represent the software production date code year month day Note The following features are not available in case the software version of the PBX is lower than the required version e Trunk Service Caller Name Announcement System Personal Caller ID Call Routing Personal Greeting for Call
110. 7 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 295 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 478 SEVENTY TWO 478 479 SIX 479 480 SIX HOUR 480 481 SIX MINUTE 481 482 SIXTEEN 482 483 SIXTEEN HOUR 483 484 SIXTEEN MINUTE 484 485 SIXTEENTH 485 486 SIXTH 486 487 SIXTY 487 488 SIXTY EIGHT 488 489 SIXTY FIVE 489 490 SIXTY FOUR 490 491 SIXTY NINE 491 492 SIXTY ONE 492 493 SIXTY SEVEN 493 494 SIXTY SIX 494 495 SIXTY THREE 495 496 SIXTY TWO 496 497 Sorry 497 498 Sorry I cannot add any more 498 499 Sorry I cannot call this number 499 388 415 500 Sorry mailbox in use cannot be 500 deleted 501 Sorry maximum of 20 destinations 501 exceeded 502 Sorry no one is available to answer 502 the call 503 Sorry no space for recording 503 504 Sorry Operator is not available to 504 answer the call Please call back later 296 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 505 Sorry there are no more matching 505 names 505 756 506 Sorry there is no space for recording 506 507 Sorry there is no space for recording 507 in this mailbox 508 Sorry this f
111. 89 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS To establish an extension group 1 2 an From the System Administration Top Menu Type 1 5 1 2 1 Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Extension Group Enter Enter a number that hasn t been assigned to another mailbox or Extension Group List This must be a vacant number Enter the extensions that are to be assigned to this group list Enter the extension numbers that are to be assigned to the Extension Group List Return to the Main Program Menu Type 1 1 1 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Assign the Extension Group List number to a mailbox If you used the number 700 for an Extension Group List number assign the number 700 as a new mailbox You must also enter 700 as an extension Messages can be delivered to the new number through normal operation 5 2 0 Interview Service The subscriber can leave a series of prerecorded questions up to 10 for the caller in an Interview Mailbox As the caller answers questions answers are recorded in the mailbox After a caller records the answers the interview mailbox lights a message waiting lamp When retrieving the messages the subscriber only hears the answers to the questions There are 2 ways to access an interview mailbox Assign an interview mailbox to an existing mailbox Assign a port as an interview mailbox To structure an interview mailbox 1 2 m From the System Administr
112. ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX See DPT Integration in Glossary Extension Group places several extensions into the same mailbox to share information using an Extension Group List The System Administrator must establish this list Up to 20 lists can be maintained by the VPS with up to 20 entries possible on each list See 5 2 8 Extension Groups See System Group Assignment Extension Group in B6 1 System Group Assignment Extension Numbering Plan permits the VPS to recognise an extension number as valid See Other Parameters Extension Numbering Plan in B6 7 Other Parameters External Message Delivery List allows a subscriber to send a message to external parties and or extensions with a single operation One subscriber can maintain up to 2 lists Each list is able to support 8 entries This feature is only available when External Message Delivery has been authorised for the subscriber s COS See External Message Delivery Service in this Table See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in Glossary See3 3 Setting up an External Message Delivery List in the Subscriber s Guide SYSTEM FEATURES 151 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE External Message Delivery Service allows a subscriber to send a message to several subscribers and non subscrib
113. ATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Fax Management allows the system to automatically route an incoming fax signal to a specific fax machine Up to 2 fax machines can be assigned using this feature Outside callers can also reach the fax machine via Custom Service selection if programmed See Fax Management 1 5 7 8 in 5 2 2 Custom Service Features See 7 3 11 Fax Call Report See 7 3 12 Fax Call Statistics Clear See Other Parameters Fax Management in B6 7 Other Parameters Group Distribution List Personal allows a subscriber to simultaneously send a message to several mailboxes using a Group Distribution List This list is established by the subscriber Each subscriber can maintain a maximum of 4 lists with up to 20 entries on each list See Group Distribution List System in this Table See Personal Group Distribution List in Glossary See4 5 Personal Group Distribution Lists in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 6 Deleting Group Distribution Members in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 7 Deleting Group Distribution Lists in the Subscriber s Guide Group Distribution List System allows a subscriber to send a message to several mailboxes using a Group Distribution List Using a list also allows a caller to record a message in several mailboxes The System Administrator must establish this list Up to 20 lists can be maintained by the VPS with up to 20 entries possible on each list
114. BER The System Administrator should explain the basic functions of the VPS to all the subscribers He should explain which service Voice Mail service Automated Attendant service Interview Service or a Custom service will play during the day and what services will play during night lunch breaks He should explain that outside callers are called non subscribers because they do not have a mailbox VPS guidance prompts will assist non subscribers in reaching the extension or mailbox they need He should explain the responsibilities of the System Administrator the Message Manager and the System Manager and how each can be contacted phone number mailbox number or email address or all three The System Administrator should also explain the special privileges of VPS subscribers Subscribers can call from any touchtone telephone in the world and get their messages To check messages or change mailbox parameters from an outside phone do the following As soon as the VPS plays a guidance message Press code 6 X and then the mailbox number For example a subscriber who has extension 215 and mailbox 215 would press code 6 215 If the subscriber has a password enabled the password must be entered If the subscriber forgets his password he should contact either the System Administrator or the System Manager Either one can clear the password so that the subscriber can establish a new password Explain the purpose of the General
115. Busy Tone The extension dialled is busy Reorder Tone An invalid extension number is dialled or the call is 3 inadvertently connected to another Voice Mail port also heard when no DTMF receiver is available to the Voice Mail extension 4 DND The extension dialled has set DND feature Do Not Disturb 5 Answer The extension dialled is answered Forwarded to Voice The extension dialled is forwarded to Voice Mail and 6 Mail Ringing another Voice Mail port is able to answer This lets the first Voice Mail port usually an Auto Attendant send the call to the other Voice Mail port INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 45 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS Table 11 Code Call State Sent to the Voice Mail Port When default Forwarded to Voice The extension dialled is forwarded to Voice Mail and no 7 Mail Busy other Voice Mail ports are available to accept the call This signals the Voice Mail port usually Auto Attendant to let the caller to leave a message g Forwarded to Extn The extension dialled is forwarded to another non Voice Mail extension 9 Confirmation Tone The Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off code is dialled successfully Disconnect The caller disconnects The central office must set a CPC 9 signal to the PBX line for this signal to work for outside calls Digit Translation Table Parameters These parameters allow PBXs t
116. COS parameters and Sorry this function is not available is played 244 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDB C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 2 to set the Class of Service 4 Type the Class of Service Number 1 64 Personal Greeting Length 5 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current length b Type the Personal Greeting length 8 60 s Note The value goes up in increments of 4 s C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it New Message Retention Time 6 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current time b Type the retention time up to 30 days C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Saved Message Retention Time 7 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current time b Type the retention time up to 30 days or 0 unlimited C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Length 8 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current length b Type the message length 1 6 min C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 245 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Number of Messages 9 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current number b Type the number of messages 5 100 c Confirm the entry is correct and
117. CRIPTION REFERENCE Call Services include a series of both incoming and outgoing call services Incoming Call Services Automated Attendant Service Voice Mail Service Interview Service Custom Service Outgoing Call Services Message Waiting Notification and External Message Delivery See Port Service Setting in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup See Incoming Call Service in Table 21 in 5 3 1 Port Service Menu See Incoming Call Service in Table 38 in B4 1 Port Assignment Call Transfer Status permits subscribers to specify how the VPS will handle calls to their individual extensions Call Transfer Status options include Call Screening Call Blocking Intercom Paging and Calling a Beeper Pager See Calling a Beeper Pager in this Table See Intercom Paging APT DPT Integration Only in this Table See Call Transfer in Glossary See4 1 Call Transfer Status in the Subscriber s Guide Callback Number Entry enables the caller to leave a callback number in several different ways depending upon which option is programmed into the system The feature can forward the callback number to a beeper pager See Notification Setting in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Beeper Callback No Entry Mode in Table 36 and 37 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Pa
118. Caller ID number is not assigned 42 42 647 392 43 Caller ID numbers assigned 541 43 44 Caller ID screen disabled 44 45 Caller ID screen enabled 45 46 Caller name is name 46 47 Caller name is erased 47 48 Caller name is not recorded 48 49 Calling the operator 49 417 50 Cannot be retrieved 50 51 Class of service number is number 51 583 51 584 51 52 Company greeting number number 52 154 53 Company greeting number is 53 number 54 Company name name 54 55 Company name erased 55 56 Counts cleared 56 57 Covering extension is extension 57 number 276 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 58 Covering extension not assigned 58 59 Covering extension transfer disabled 59 60 Covering extension transfer enabled 60 61 Custom service menu 61 61 154 62 Custom service number number 62 63 Date is date 63 64 Day mode first operator s extension is 64 extention number 65 Day mode first operator s extension is 65 not assigned 66 Day mode second operator s 66 extension is extention number 67 Day mode second operator s 67 extension is not assigned 68 Day mode third operator s extension 68 is extention number 69 Day mode third operato
119. D1232 AND KX TD612 Checking Flash Memory Cards is displayed on the screen Screen output Checking Flash Memory Cards Please wait PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP 1 4 2 3 The VPS tests the CPU card the flash memory and the ports until 1 2 3 is displayed Active ports are displayed on the screen Screen output Active COs 12 DPT Interface Connection is Established ON LINE MODE The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully Screen output Active COs 12 DPT Interface Connection is not Established OFF LINE MODE This message is shown when the digital DPT connection between the VPS and telephone system cannot be established Possible causes of the message DPT Interface Connection is not Established Table 16 Cause Action The PBX is not a KX TD series Change the PBX type by using system Since the default PBX type for Quick Setup see Section 5 the KX TVP50 is to KX TD816 1232 612 at the factory this message will always appear when connecting to another type of PBX The cabling between the PBX Confirm the cabling is extension ports and the VPS is not 4 connected as described in wire or is improperly connected Section 2 INSTALLATION The PBX is a KX TD series but does Consult your dealer or use not have the proper level of software Inband Integration under required to support DPT I
120. DELINES FOR INTEGRATION 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION 3 1 1 APT DPT Inband Signalling There are 3 types of integration available on the KX TVP50 Inband Signalling APT and DPT The VPS used with any other brand of telephone equipment requires inband equipment KX TA series PBX can use APT Integration KX TD series PBX can use DPT Integration 3 1 2 Why Integration is Important The KX TVP50 works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard single line tip ring telephone interface However the VPS operation depends on the capabilities and features provided by the PBX its performance will vary when connected with different PBX systems For example Follow on or Called Party ID is a feature of the PBX If the PBX does not have this feature the VPS cannot transfer calls directly to the correct mailbox and play the busy or no answer greeting for that mailbox 3 1 3 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate To the PBX the VPS looks like SLT sets The PBX thinks that the VPS is an SLT and the VPS mimics all actions a live attendant would carry out from an SLT For the VPS and the PBX to communicate proper signalling is important Like an attendant the VPS places calls by going off hook and dialling numbers It starts call transfers with a hookswitch flash to put callers on hold and then dials the extension number By recognising call progress tones from the PBX the VPS decides how calls should be handl
121. Delivery Mailbox The Message Manager will periodically check it and forward the contents to the appropriate subscriber Explain the purpose of the System Group Distribution Lists They can be created by the System Administrator to facilitate the distribution of messages to several subscribers In particular senior staff members ought to know how to take advantage of System Group Distribution Lists Twenty lists can be created with twenty mailboxes in each list Finally if Custom Service menus are used subscribers should be encouraged to listen to these menus often and make suggestions for improvement Custom service is a very powerful feature of the Panasonic VPS Make the most of this feature CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 101 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER 102 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM Section 6 FINAL SETUP FINAL SETUP 103 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 The Message Manager is responsible for recording and updating a wide variety of system messages Please see Appendix D 06 RECORDING MESSAGES to see the full array of recording tasks Follow the instructions below to record Custom Service prompts and user prompts 6 1 1 Accessing the Message Manager s Mailbox 1 Enter an extension number that is connected to the Voice Mail You will hear the initial prompt Good morning Good afternoon Good evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System
122. Glossary See 3 1 Delivering Messages to Other Subscribers in the Subscriber s Guide Receive Message allows subscribers to access messages left in their mailboxes Three options are available to subscribers Reply to Message Sender permits subscribers to reply to the message sender without specifying the extension Message Transfer permits subscribers to transfer their messages to other mailboxes Message Scan permits subscribers to listen to the first 4 s of each message See Message Transfer and Message Scan in this Table See 2 1 Receiving Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See2 2 Replying to Messages in the Subscriber s Guide Rotary Telephone Service provides guidance to callers using rotary telephone systems or when several seconds pass without anything being entered by the caller See Other Parameters Rotary Telephone Service in B6 7 Other Parameters See Rotary Telephone in Glossary 164 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Service Access Commands allow the caller to directly access several standard features 0 to repeat the Help Menu or call the operator X to return to previous menu 1 to dial by name 3 Department Dialling 5 Login 6 Voice Mail Service 7 to restart Subscriber s main menu 8 to call transfer 9 to exit See 5 2 6 Voic
123. HE VPS ON A WALL 2 3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL The wall where the VPS is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the VPS If screws other than the ones supplied are used use the same sized diameter screws as the enclosed ones Mounting on a Wooden Wall 1 Place the template included on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions Wooden Wall Drive the screw to this position 26 INSTALLATION 2 3 MOUNTING THE VPS A WALL Mounting on a Concrete or Mortar Wall 1 Place the template included on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions 2 Drill 3 holes and drive the anchor plugs user supplied with a hammer flush to the wall Drive the screw to this position INSTALLATION 27 2 4 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION 2 4 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION 1 2 3 4 IMPORTANT Connect the frame of the main unit to the earth Loosen the screw Insert the earth wire Tighten the screw Connect the earth wire to the earth RAS TAI 28 INSTALLATION 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS The following is an overview of the standard installation process using APT DPT Integration When necessary other sections in this manual have been referenced for more detailed descriptions or instructions 1 Get a list of cur
124. ING 123 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 4 Dept Dial Department Dialling menu will play when the 4 is pressed 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR Each Custom Service has an access counter that counts the number of times the service has been accessed This command clears this counter Type CCLR Press Space and Enter Custom Service Menu 1 100 then Press RETURN CCLR 20 Custom Menu lt 20 gt Access Counter Cleared Note Type CCLR 0 to clear the access counters of all Custom Services 7 2 13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL This command is used to specify the number of times the VPS will attempt to turn on the Message Waiting Lamp of the called extension This setting is required when a PBX other than the Panasonic KX T series telephone system is used MWL Current Setting of M W L Retry Count is 1 Enter M W L Retry Count 1 3 Note This setting is not valid if Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message is set to Yes 7 2 44 Setting Minimum Recording Length MRL This command is used to specify the minimum message recording length 0 3 s Messages shorter than this setting are discarded from the mailbox Note The minimum recording length can only be set using this command 1 Type MRL then Press RETURN 124 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS MRL Current Setting of Minimum Recording Length is 2 Enter Minimu
125. INTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 137 74 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 7 4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Table 29 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Nothing is heard from the VPS when accessing the VPS even though DPT Integration has been established Bad connection with PBX Check the System Program 117 or 126 of the KX TD series to see if the programming agrees with the actual connection The VPS does not operate Bad printed circuit board Bad connection with PBX Incomplete card attachment Change the printed circuit board Check the connection between the VPS and PBX Attach the card firmly Dialling is not registered A pulse phone is being used by mistake Improper setting of integration mode Change to a touch tone phone Adjust the integration mode properly between the VPS and your PBX See Integration Mode in Table 69 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Line disconnection occurs while transferring an outside call Outside calls cannot be transferred Improper setting of the sequence Improper setting of the hooking time Improper setting of the CPC signal Adjust the transfer sequence to that of the connected PBX and reset See Operator Transfer Sequence and Extension Transfer Sequence in Table 70 in 7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Adjust the hooking time to that of the connected PBX and reset See Flash Time in Table 66 in B7
126. M a m p m Sun MON SUN Start End None Time Service Break Service To access the proper menu for Break Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 3 Table 51 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End times of the Break Break 1 Service 00 59 min Service Break 2 Service AM PM a m p m Break A Service MON SUN Note When Break Service periods overlap Lunch Service period Lunch Service has priority Start End None Sun Break 1 Service Break 2 Service Break 3 Service Start End 210 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 3 Holiday Setting A special service mode can be programmed for up to 20 holidays When a day is set as a holiday settings in this parameter have priority over settings for Trunk Service Port Service and Caller ID Call Routing To provide a special message to callers on a holiday for example Today is New Year s Day and our office is closed If you wish to record a message please press 1 now you can create a Custom Service menu Use this setting to direct calls to this Custom Service on Jan 1st Use foreign languages where appropriate To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 Holiday Setting Enter
127. M known by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of ADMINISTRATION the mailbox owner s last name The VPS MAILBOXES identifies all subscribers with that letter combination and states each name for the caller The caller selects the desired subscriber by entering the appropriate number Direct Mailbox allows subscribers to call the VPS and access See4 1 GUIDELINES FOR Access APT DPT mailbox without entering the mailbox DIGITAL INTEGRATION See Direct Mailbox Access in Table 36 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Direct Mailbox Access in Glossary 150 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DPT Integration is the interface data link that permits certain See Voice Mail in information and command functions to be sent to the VPS by the PBX The information and command functions include Auto Configuration Caller ID Call Routing Caller Name Announcement System Personal Direct Mailbox Access Intercom Paging Live Call Screening Personal Greeting for Caller ID Two Way Record and Two Way Transfer 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible See 1 4 4 DPT Integration See 1 4 5 Connection Example DPT Integration See 2 7 CONNECTIONS See3 1 1 APT DPT or Inband Signalling See Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA
128. M Mode 2 Press the desired Flexible CO or DSS BLF button that you want to assign as the TWR button 3 Press 90 for KX TA series or 83 for KX TD series Screen output 2WAY REC INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 69 44 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 4 4 11 4 4 12 4 Enter Voice Mail extension number Screen output 2WAY REC ___ _ _ _ The extension number you entered 5 Press STORE 6 Exit the program mode For KX TA series Set the MEMORY switch to SET on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series For KX TD series Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 7 Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions This button must be a CO or DSS BLF button to be programmed as a TWR button When all Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed the user will hear reorder tone Two Way Transfer into Mailbox This feature allows an extension users to record a conversation into another person s mailbox by pressing the Two Way Transfer TWT button followed by the mailbox number This is commonly used by a person who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants the message recorded in the mailbox at the same time Two Way Transfer Button Assignment For the Two Way Transfer feature to work at an extension the extension must have a TWT button on it This button must be either a D
129. Message Waiting Notification Authorisation for Auto Forwarding mbox Mailbox No dl Delay Time md Forwarding Mode M move C copy The System Service Report provides information about the VPS s usable ports outside line trunk groups and Holiday Services It also indicates the services assigned to each VPS port and each outside line trunk group for Day Night Lunch and Break modes each Holiday Service and all incoming and outgoing call services To select the System Service Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 3 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 131 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS System Service Report 4 JAN 1999 7 46 PM Port Day mode Night mode Lunch mode Break mode Srv Srv Srv Srv 1 AA V M C S 1 V M 2 AA AA CS 1 Trunk mode Night mode Lunch mode Break mode Srv Srv Srv Srv 1 C S 1 8 2 V M V M Holiday List Day Srv Port Description 1 JAN C S 100 1 2 NEW YEAR S DAY V M Voice Mail Service C S Custom Service A A Automated Attendant LS Interview Service Service 7 3 4 Call Account Report The VPS can store information for up to 64 outgoing calling sequences for accounting and billing purposes Outgoing calling information includes the mailbox numbers that executed outgoing calls the telephone numbers called the call dates and call duration times When the number o
130. NG THE SYSTEM 75 5 1 STARTING UP 1 PBX Type a Press ENTER Screen output Quick Setup PBX type Please select your PBX type KX T308 K X T616 KX T1232 KX T96 KX T336 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TD612 KX TD308 KX TA series OTHERS 2 3 4 9 6 7 0 b Select your PBX type The required steps are different for some models Go to the step indicated below for that type Table 18 1 KX T308 KX T616 Go to Step 2 2 KX T123210 3 96 4 KX T336 0 Others 5 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TD612 E 7 KX TA series Note APT Integration with the KX TA series will be activated automatically by selecting 7 KX TA series DPT Integration with the KX TD816 KX TD1232 or KX TD612 will be activated automatically by selecting 5 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TD612 APT DPT Integration provides a quicker way to create mailboxes and set the time and date by transferring extension and time information from the PBX automatically 76 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 1 STARTING UP 2 Extension Numbers of VPS Ports Screen output Quick Setup Assigned extension No of VPS Port Please enter extension number of VPS 1 2 Please enter extension numbers 2 digits S Next Screen Enter extension numbers of VPS ports with 2 digit numbers This improves the VPS integration with the KX T308 or KX T616 by allowing the VPS to discriminate between VPS ex
131. Names D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Caller Name Announcement System Personal in Glossary SYSTEM FEATURES 147 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Calling a Beeper allows a subscriber to be notified by a beeper See Dial Number and Type of Pager pager when he has a message s If the Device in Table 35 in B2 beeper pager has a display it is possible to SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION send to it a callback number The callback MAILBOXES number can be recorded when a caller leaves Authorisation for Message a message If the caller does not leave a Notification and Beeper callback number the System Callback No or Callback No Entry Mode in the caller s number if it is received through a Table 36 and 37 in SYSTEM telephone company s Caller ID service will ADMINISTRATION be sent instead SETTING COS CLASS OF T SERVICE PARAMETERS To utilise this feature follow the procedure See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE b PARAMETERS Go to the System Administration Top Menu and type 1 2 Program Class of Service and COS No 1 63 Select Yes in the authorisation for Message Notification parameter Make 1 selection as you like in the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode parameter 2 From the System Administration Top Menu type 1 1 1 Mailbox No Y 2 Device No 1 3 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Mailbox No Entry Do you wa
132. ORTY EIGHT 216 217 FORTY EIGHT MINUTE 217 218 FORTY FIVE 218 219 FORTY FIVE MINUTE 219 220 FORTY FOUR 220 221 FORTY FOUR MINUTE 221 222 FORTY NINE 222 223 FORTY NINE MINUTE 223 224 FORTY ONE 224 225 FORTY ONE MINUTE 225 226 FORTY SEVEN 226 227 FORTY SEVEN MINUTE 227 284 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 228 FORTY SIX 228 229 FORTY SIX MINUTE 229 230 FORTY THREE 230 231 FORTY THREE MINUTE 231 232 FORTY TWO 232 233 FORTY TWO MINUTE 233 234 Forwarding mailbox number is 234 mailbox number 235 Forwarding mailbox number is not 235 assigned 236 Forwarding mode is copy 236 237 Forwarding mode is move 237 238 FOUR 238 239 FOUR HOUR 239 240 FOUR MINUTE 240 241 FOURTEEN 241 242 FOURTEEN HOUR 242 243 FOURTEEN MINUTE 243 244 FOURTEENTH 244 245 FOURTH 245 246 FRIDAY 246 247 from name 575 247 248 Good afternoon 248 819 248 249 Good evening 249 819 249 250 Good morning 250 819 250 251 Greeting erased 251 252 greeting is message 38 252 253 greeting is not recorded 38 253 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 285 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
133. Output To select Input Output follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 2 Table 74 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Table Input digit Up to 8 Do not assign more than 1 code to an incoming 1 8 digits signal If this occurs the system will take the first S assignment Output consisting of digit 0 9 X A D None SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 237 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS 238 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Appendix SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 239 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX The System Manager s Mailbox must be accessed before any System Manager task can be performed Three items of information must be known before accessing the System Manager s Mailbox the telephone number connected directly to the Voice Mail Service the System Manager s Mailbox Number and the Password for that mailbox if assigned The System Manager s Mailbox Number is 99 999 9999 or 99999 depending upon the mailbox number length specified in System Programming The System Manager s password is assigned through the System Manager s Service To Access the System Manager s Mailbox 1 Dial the extension number connected to the Voice Mail Service Or Dial any VPS extension number and Press 6 Service Access Command Ple
134. PBX is connected and the software is upgraded DPT Integration is only available when a KX TD series PBX is connected and the software is upgraded Table 10 SEQUENCE CODES D Disconnect F Hookswitch Flash R Ring Detection S Silence Detection T Dialtone Detection W Wait for 1 Second X Dial Extension A Answer 0 9 x DTMF Digits Operator Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to the operator Example FTX hookswitch flash dial tone dial operator extn Extension Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension Example FTX hookswitch flash dial tone dial extn Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension that is entered into the Alternate Extension Group This is useful for extensions that need a special transfer procedure i e blind transfer such as modem extensions Example FTXD hookswitch flash dial tone dial extn hang up Reconnect Sequence on Busy Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the extension the caller has dialled is busy PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Reconnect Sequence on No Answer Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the extension the caller has dialled does not 44 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS answer PBXs differ in how they h
135. PT Integration Use a 2 conductor wire for connection to all other PBXs 4 Conductor Wire Modular Connection B BLACK RED Outer Pins G GREEN Inner Pins Y YELLOW 2 7 2 Opening the Ferrite Core Insert a flathead screwdriver into each opening of the ferrite core and unlatch the cover as shown below Connect 4 conductor wire or 2 conductor wire to the KX TVP50 and run the wire through the ferrite core see following pages Close the ferrite core INSTALLATION 33 2 7 CONNECTIONS 2 7 3 Connection for APT Integration Ports 1 2 of the KX TVP50 Telephone Line Modular Jacks To KX TA series V Extension Jacks 07 and 08 or 15 and 16 To Extension Ces s ESF Port of the PBX T S is 2 7 4 Connection for DPT Integration Ports 1 2 of the KX TVP50 Telephone Line Modular Jacks PORT 1 PORT 2 To KX TD1232 816 612 Any Extension Jack except Jack 01 To Extension EG Put of the PBX ESQ 3 ESE 34 INSTALLATION 2 7 CONNECTIONS 2 7 5 Connection for Non APT DPT Integration Ports 1 2 of the KX TVP50 Telephone Line Modular Jacks PORT 1 E
136. Panasonic Voice Processing System Installation Manual Model No KX TV P50 Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Voice Processing System Model KX TVP50 Please read this manual before installing customising or operating the Voice Processing System Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic KX TVP50 Voice Processing System We are confident that it will provide your customer or client with many years of dependable service This Voice Processing System was especially tailored for the environment of your country For example it can be configured for English or other languages System prompts Recorded by the factory in English User 1 prompts Record in any language you like User 2 prompts Record in any language you like These prompts guide subscribers and non subscribers through specific VPS operations However we would like to stress that for outside callers who merely need to be guided to an extension a mailbox or other destinations e g a fax machine they can be greeted by a Custom Service This supports many languages as there are 12 keys on a touchtone phone and you can record up to 100 Custom Service menus One twelfth of these menus can be in recorded in one language if you desire Another twelfth can be recorded in another language and so on Thus callers can be guided entirely in their native languages For a multi cultural country Custom Service is a trul
137. R S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 107 Enter for AM or 2 for PM 107 108 Enter a class of service number from 108 1 to 64 109 Enter a group number from 1 to 8 109 110 Enter a group number 1 through 4 110 111 Enter a mailbox list number 111 112 Enter a message length from 1 to 6 112 minutes 113 Enter a message retention time up to 113 30 days 114 Enter a personal greeting length from 114 8 to 60 seconds 115 Enter delivery list number 1 or 2 115 116 Enter device number 1 through 3 116 117 Enter extension number 117 118 Enter question number followed by 118 the hash sign 119 Enter question number followed 119 the pound sign 120 Enter the 4 digits password 120 747 120 746 121 Enter the caller ID number 121 822 82 122 Enter the caller name announcement 122 number 1 through 120 123 Enter the company greeting number 1 123 through 32 124 Enter the custom service prompt 124 number 1 through 100 To record custom service exit prompt press 0 125 Enter the day of the month followed 125 by the hash sign 126 Enter the day of the month followed 126 by the pound sign MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 279 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifi
138. R S MAILBOX 7 Type the extension number 8 The VPS plays the current extension setting Press 2 to accept the entry 9 Repeat the Steps 6 8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day Night Lunch and Break Modes for each operator 266 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 05 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK The system clock can be set directly from the telephone It is important to set the exact time because Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery redialling and rescheduling of External Message Delivery and Automatic Message Deletion are all scheduled using this setting The System Administrator and System Manager are also able to set this clock The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and ends Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the Message Manager cannot set the system clock and Sorry this function is not available is played 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 4 to set the time and date 3 Press 1 to change the current setting 4 Type the current time and Press Note Press 0 for help For example to enter 5 o clock press 5 and or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and f 5 Press 1 for AM or for 2 PM Note If 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in B6 5 Prompt Setting this selection cannot be done 6 Press 2 to accept the time 7 Press
139. RtN RtS Ln CaNCaT RO SI SP CW MC DM PG Pr CN GC CS MN ED pr AF mbox dl md 1 16 10 10 5 10 10 L N N NNN 1 U30Y Y X X Ul ae 2 16 7 7 3 10 10 L N N N 2 Ul 30 Y Y X X Ul os Z 3 8 7 7 3 10 10 P Y NON N N 3 8 30 Y Y X a ce B 6j 30 6 6 10010 L N c C Ui Go OIX ew amp 2 amp uu x 64 30 6 6 10010 L N c x e e XE Roux x om wu x o x9 x 130 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS COS RtN Ln CaT SI CW PG CN CS ED pr 7 3 3 System Service Report Class of Service number New Message Retention Message Length Time Maximum Message Time Message Scanning with Information Use Call Waiting on Busy Intercom Paging Group Maximum number of names for Personal Caller Name Announcement Caller ID Screening Authorisation for External Message Delivery Prompt Mode SY System U1 User 1 U2 User 2 SL Selective Note An X displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to Yes GL RtS CaN RO SP DM Pr GC MN AF Personal Greeting Length Saved Message Retention Time Maximum Message Message Retrieval Order L LIFO F FIFO Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting Direct Mailbox Access Prompt Mode S System Prompts U1 User 1 Prompts U2 User 2 Prompts Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID Authorisation for
140. SS BLF or CO button must have a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign a TWT button on an extension This is a station level program and should be done at each individual phone 1 Enter Station Programming For KX TA series With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX TD series a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode 2 Press the desired Flexible CO or DSS BLF button that you want to assign as the TWT button 3 Press 91 for KX TA series or 84 for KX TD series Screen output 2WAY TRANS 70 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 44 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 4 4 13 Enter a Voice Mail extension number Screen output 2WAY TRANS ___ ___ The extension number you entered Press STORE Exit the program mode For KX TA series Set the MEMORY switch to SET on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series For KX TD series Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions This button must be a CO or DSS BLF button to be programmed as a TWT button When all Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed the user will hear reorder tone Voice Ma
141. STENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 The VPS plays the number of new messages Press 1 to listen to the messages 3 The VPS plays each message with the sender identified along with when the message was recorded Press 0 to listen to the entire menu I Repeat this message 1 1 Replay the Previous Message 2 Play the Next Message 3 Erase this Message 4 Reply 5 Rewind 6 Fast Forward 7 Transfer 8 Message Scan 258 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Appendix D MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 259 DI ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX The Message Manager s Mailbox must be accessed before any Message Manager task can be performed Three items of information are required before accessing the Message Manager s Mailbox the telephone number connected directly to the Voice Mail Service the Message Manager s Mailbox Number and the Message Manager s Password The Message Manager s Mailbox Number is 98 998 9998 or 99998 depending upon the mailbox number length specified in System Programming The Message Manager s password is assigned through the Message Manager s Service To Access the Message Manager s Mailbox 1 Dial the extension number connected to the Voice Mail Service Or Dial any VPS extension number and Press 2 6 Service Access Command Please enter the person s mailbox nu
142. Setup Press 1 The VPS begins to change system programming data Screen output Quick Setup To set up the mailbox and restart select Yes To cancel and exit select 1 Yes 2 No Setup 101 Selecting No in the above screen cancels all changes made up to this point Then PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP and 1 2 3 appear on the screen one by one Screen output PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP 1 235354 Screen output when Quick Setup is finished ON LINE MODE gt Press ENTER Screen output System Administration Top Menu Program System Reports Utility Command System Reset Clear Quick Setup VT100 Mode Only Enter the number CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 81 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS 5 20 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Design each system to suit the needs of the customer You should be familiar with all options for port assignment so that customers get exactly what they need and expect Each port can be assigned as Voice Mail Interview Service Automated Attendant or Custom Service Custom Service is the most flexible of all the services because it allows access to the other services by pressing one key We recommend programming all ports as Custom Service for caller convenience 5 2 1 Custom Service Setting Example Custom Service incorporates all features of the Automated Attendant and Voice Mail Custom Serv
143. System Prompts 4 Factory recorded English prompts cw All service prompts are set to User 1 Prompts not 13 recorded pai All service prompts are set to User 2 Prompts not l4 recorded 15 Reserved For Panasonic KX TD series telephone systems with DPT Integration 2 For Panasonic KX TA series telephone system with APT Integration To change the position use a pointed object such as a pen etc Note When setting the DIP switch to any position except 0 first disconnect the station wire s and wait a few minutes then disconnect the AC cord from the VPS Set the DIP switch and connect the AC cord to the VPS wait approximately 3 5 min and then return the DIP switch to position 0 Earth Terminal This terminal should be connected to a earth source with less than 1 resistance EIA RS 232C Connector Connects an ASCII or VT terminal to the VPS must be used to program system Memory Card 1 system Stores the proprietary system program and the voice prompts about 30 min worth has the capacity to record approximately 2 h of messages from callers Optional Expansion Memory Card The KX TVP52 can expand the flash memory capacity of the KX TVP50 by 2 h 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible We recommend integration with the following Panasonic phone systems Panasonic KX TD1232 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 17 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS Panasonic K
144. TX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX Reconnect Sequence on Busy FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F Reconnect Sequence on No Answer FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F Reconnect Sequence on Refuse Call FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp None N A T701X T 91X Tx9X T701X SAREI yes Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp None N A T702X T 90X T 9X T700X E oz Call Waiting Sequence None N A N A N A 2 2 2 2 Release Sequence for Call Waiting None N A N A N A F F F F SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 231 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS When your KX TD series telephone system is in DPT Integration mode When your KX TA series telephone system is in APT Integration mode N A Not available Not needed Table 69 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Integration Mode 1 None 2 Inband 3 APT 4 DPT DPT Specifies the method of integrating the VPS with the PBX 1 None Both PBX and VPS work independently without accessing information concerning the status of the other Inband The PBX sends DTMF tone codes to the VPS to indicate the state of the call busy answered disconnect etc VPS performance is improved with Inband Integration bec
145. URN PASS 1 Administrator Password 2 System Reset Clear Password 2 To create a password or change an existing password go to Step 3 To clear a password go to Step 4 3 To create a password or change an existing password a Type 1 or 2 Maximum 8 characters NEW PASSWORD Note When you press 2 to change the System Reset Clear password you should type the current OLD password before entering a new one b Type the password SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 115 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Verification c Type the password again for verification 4 To clear a password a Type 1 or 2 Maximum 8 characters NEW PASSWORD b Press ENTER Do not type a password on this screen VERIFICATION c Press ENTER Do not type a password on this screen Note The password entered on the screen will not appear The VPS does not distinguish the capital letter from the small letter 7 2 4 Set Time TIME The TIME command is used to set the system date and time A number of system functions require that the system time and date be set correctly These functions include message waiting notification external message delivery call retries after initial failure to connect and automatic deletion of messages 1 Type TIME then Press RETURN TIME Current time is 12 34 PM Enter new time HH MM AM PM 2 Type the c
146. Up to 12 digits can be set for each parameter D Disconnecting F Hook Flash R Ringback Tone Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 S X Extension dialling A Answer 1 9 0 X Dial Codes Table 70 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator This sequence is performed by the VPS when transferring Transfer FX calls to the operator s extension Sequence Extension This sequence is performed by the VPS when transferring Transfer FX calls to any extension except the operator s Sequence Alternate This sequence is performed by the VPS when transferring Extension calls to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group FX Transfer Sequence Reconnect If an extension is busy this sequence allows the VPS to Sequence on F reconnect to the caller Busy Reconnect If the extension does not answer this sequence allows the Sequence on F VPS to reconnect with the caller No Answer SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 233 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table 70 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Reconnect This sequence is performed by the VPS to retrieve a call Sequence on placed on hold after the extension in the Call Screening Refuse Call mode has refused to accept it Light On The dialling sequence that the VPS must perform to Sequence for enable the Message Waitin
147. Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message The VPS disconnects the call after playing Thank you for calling SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 197 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Message 4 Next Operator Caller Select 1 Table 42 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how Operator 2 calls are handled when not Coverage 2 Leave Message answered within the time period set through the Mode 3 Disconnect Operator No Answer Time mode Caller Select This selection allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension Leave Message The caller is instructed to leave a message in Operator 2 s mailbox Disconnect message The caller is disconnected after playing Thank you for calling Next Operator The system transfers the call to Operator 3 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 3 Operator seeking calls to Operator 3 when Operator 2 is busy or unanswered and Operator 2 s parameters are set as follows Busy Coverage Mode No Answer Coverage No Answer Coverage Mode next Operator shown To select Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 3 follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 3 Table 43 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator s 1 5 digits Used to select the extension number for Op
148. X TD1232 should be able to communicate through Digital Integration When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the station information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS 64 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 44 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 4 4 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES The following features can be used on any KX T proprietary telephone 7000 7300 series analogue 7200 7400 7500 series digital KX T7000 K X T7300 series are used with the KX TA series The KX T7200 K X T7400 K X T7500 series are used with the KX TD series 4 41 Live Call Screening LCS Programming LCS notifies subscribers of incoming messages to their mailboxes The notification method is programmable for hands free or private Hands free allows the user to monitor a recording through the speakerphone and if desired intercept the call by lifting the handset The private mode notifies the user with an alert tone when a message is being recorded By pressing the LCS button the user can monitor the message and intercept the call by going off hook System Programming also determines whether the mailbox continues to record after the user intercepts the call 4 4 2 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment This program allows the VPS to continue recording the convers
149. X TD816 Panasonic KX TD612 Panasonic KX TA series We cannot guarantee adequate integration of the KX TVP50 with other PBX systems or with Key Systems If the customer does not have one of the recommended Panasonic PBX systems be sure that the system has the features listed below The PBX should have the following features for successful integration Single line tip ring port circuits Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this connection Station to station DTMF signalling Message Waiting Notification from an SLT single line telephone Screened transfer from an SLT Message Waiting Notification on proprietary multi line sets message waiting lamp accessed by dialling on off codes If the PBX does not have these features VPS operation will be limited See 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration You will find the following information about each feature listed Description Limitations of the system without the feature Tests to determine whether the PBX has the feature VOICE MAIL The recommended Panasonic PBX systems have Follow on ID and Inband Integration When callers are transferred to an extension that is forwarded to Voice Mail Follow on ID sends callers directly to the mailbox Without Follow on ID the caller would have to re enter the mailbox number when connected to the Voice Mail DTMF Integration enables the VPS to recognise the current state of the call and improve its call handling performa
150. X beforehand the VPS will record the two way conversation If set to Yes the VPS will automatically delete this recording The two way conversation may be saved in the mailbox if the PBX allows the conversation to be recorded If set to No the recording will be automatically saved Note The Live Call Screening feature is available if APT DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TA series or KX TD series telephone system 182 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table 36 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Direct Mailbox 1 Yes If set to Yes a Subscriber is able to directly enter the Access 2 No Subscriber Service This is accomplished by calling a Yes VPS extension directly from the Subscriber s extension The Subscriber Service Access Code mailbox number should not be dialled Password entry may be required if specified beforehand Note The Direct Mailbox Access feature is available if APT DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TA series or KX TD series telephone system Intercom 1 9 Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to Paging Group COS NO 1 9 Subscriber Group 1 9 If set to 9 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for COS NO 10 62 jall groups Group 1 Note The Intercom Paging feature is available if APT DPT Voice Mail
151. Y NINE MINUTE 786 787 TWENTY NINTH 787 788 TWENTY ONE 788 789 TWENTY ONE HOUR 789 790 TWENTY ONE MINUTE 790 791 TWENTY SECOND 791 792 TWENTY SEVEN 792 793 TWENTY SEVEN MINUTE 793 794 TWENTY SEVENTH 794 795 TWENTY SIX 795 796 TWENTY SIX MINUTE 796 797 TWENTY SIXTH 797 798 TWENTY THIRD 798 799 TWENTY THREE 799 800 TWENTY THREE HOUR 800 801 TWENTY THREE MINUTE 801 802 TWENTY TWO 802 803 TWENTY TWO HOUR 803 804 TWENTY TWO MINUTE 804 805 TWENTIETH 805 806 TWO 806 807 TWO HOUR 807 808 TWO MINUTE 808 809 unsuccessful attempts to enter this 544 809 mailbox 810 Use call waiting on busy signal 810 disabled MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 315 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 811 Use call waiting on busy signal 811 enabled 812 Use the hash sign key as a wild 137 812 character 813 Use the pound sign key as a wild card 137 813 character 814 Verification deleted 814 815 was erased 157 815 24 816 was sent on date 305 816 17 817 WEDNESDAY 817 818 Welcome to the general delivery 818 mailbox 819 Welcome to the Voice Processing 250 819 System 248 819 249 819 819 820 When you are finished hang up or 411 822 82 820 stay on the line to confirm or c
152. able Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 127 Enter the day followed by the hash 127 sign 128 Enter the day followed by the pound 128 sign 129 Enter the delay time followed by the 129 hash sign 130 Enter the delay time followed by the 130 pound sign 131 Enter the destination mailbox number 131 675 131 674 132 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the 132 198 199 person s last name 132 133 Enter the first 4 letters of the owner s 133 last name 134 Enter the interview mailbox number 134 135 Enter the last 2 digits of the year 135 followed by the hash sign 136 Enter the last 2 digits of the year 136 followed by the pound sign 137 Enter the mailbox number 137 137 812 137 813 138 Enter the maximum number of caller 138 IDs for caller name announce Valid entries are from 0 to 30 139 Enter the maximum number of 139 messages per mailbox Valid entries are from 5 to 100 140 Enter the month followed by the hash 140 208 sign 141 Enter the month followed by the 141 208 pound sign 142 Enter the new time followed by the 142 208 hash sign 143 Enter the new time followed by the 143 208 pound sign 280 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS sent to name Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 144 Enter the operator s
153. ain See VOICE MAIL in information and command functions to be 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems sentto the VPS by the PBX The information are Compatible and command functions include Auto e See 1 42 APT Integration Configuration Caller ID Call Routing Caller Name Announcement System Personal Example APT Integration Direct Mailbox Access Intercom paging Live Call Screening Personal Greeting for See 2 7 CONNECTIONS Caller ID Two Way Recording and Two Way See3 1 1 APT DPT or Inband transfer Signalling See Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX See 1 4 3 Connection TD DIGITAL PBX e See APT Integration in Glossary Auto Configuration creates mailboxes by obtaining extension See System Components in APT DPT numbers from the Panasonic KX TA series or 1 3 2 System Components Integration Only KX TD series telephone system e See4 1 GUIDELINES FOR Also sets the time and date automatically by DIGITAL INTEGRATION obtaining time information See Creating Mailboxes in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup e See Auto Configuration in Glossary 144 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Auto Forwarding forwards or copies messages not retrieved from one mailbox to another after a specified period of time This service is only available to subscribers Class of Service programming d
154. an report outgoing calls and calling times for billing purposes on periodic port usage reports Call Transfer 10 60 s Specifies the amount of time that the VPS must wait No Answer 20 before retrieving the transferred call when there is no Time answer at the destination extension Outgoing Call 10 90 s Specifies the amount of time that the VPS must wait No Answer 30 before concluding that there is no answer at the outside Time number called Pause Time 1 9s Specifies the pause time between dialled digits 2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 57 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Outgoing Call Up to 12 digits Specifies the sequence of codes used by the VPS when Setup consisting of calling an outside line Up to 12 digits can be set The Sequence 0 9 X F R S T default value is T T indicates that the system will W dial the outside phone number only after detecting a T dial tone Example OW 0 1 s wait dial outside phone number is the outside line access number F Hook Flash R Ringback Tone Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 s 1 9 0 Dial Codes Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification The following parameters are used to control the handling of message waiting notification calls shown To select the Message Waiting N
155. and 08 of the KX TA series The other extension group is for jack 15 or jacks 15 and 16 48 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs 4 Enable hunting for the VPS extension groups using System Program 100 5 Set the hunting type for the VPS extension groups to circular using System Program 101 6 Atevery VPS extension temporarily connect an SLT or butt set go off hook and dial 7301 to turn on Data Line Security This prevents the KX TA series from sending Executive Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions We recommend that all Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording 7 Select the appropriate outside CO line feature settings depending on how your customer plans to use the VPS A to answer all incoming calls B as an operator backup or C to only answer calls not answered by user extensions Recommended outside CO line feature settings If the KX TVP50 is answering all incoming calls Outside CO Line Mode Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group The KX TA series will allow incoming outside calls to hunt only if the outside CO lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group Lines programmed as Normal do not hunt b If the KX TVP50 is only answ
156. and often necessary to have 1 custom service lead to another custom service For example if someone presses 1 for sales you might want another menu to say for new car sales press 1 for used car sales press 2 This way callers are routed directly to the person best suited to handle them Sample Custom Service for Foreign Languages If you are an airline or travel agency your callers might not be fluent in English You can easily accommodate several languages with Custom Service For example each key on the keypad there are 12 keys could be assigned to a language Record Custom Service Menu 100 so that the caller can select a language with one touch dialling For example the top menu could be For English press 1 For French press 2 For Spanish press 3 For German press 4 For Japanese press 5 For Chinese press 6 etc Of course selections should be recorded in their respective languages At the next level create menus in each language for Day Mode For example Custom Service Menu 2 the one for English callers might be For departure information press 1 For arrival information press 2 For reservations press 3 To leave a message press 4 To send a fax press 5 Thus at this level or at an even lower level a caller can be guided in his native tongue to the right person extension the right message taker mailbox or the right device fax machine In parallel create menus in each language for Night Lun
157. andle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Reconnect Sequence on Refused Call Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the extension dialled has Call Screening enabled and the subscriber chooses not to take the call PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must use to turn on a message waiting lamp at an extension Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must use to turn off a message waiting lamp at an extension Call Waiting Sequence This sequence is carried out by the VPS to perform call waiting when the extension being called is busy PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Release Sequence for Call Waiting This sequence is carried out by the VPS to release call waiting PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Inband Signalling These parameters are used when the Integration Mode is set to Inband If the PBX type is set to a KX T series system these parameters will be automatically set If another type PBX is used check that system s installation manual for settings Table 11 Code Call State Sent to the Voice Mail Port When default 1 Ringback Tone The extension dialled is ringing 2
158. appears and shows download progress Download time will vary depending on the communication speed and file sizes SAVE Completed will appear on the screen when the file has been saved Continue saving the other items as needed It is not necessary to save the Program because it is resident on the flash memory Master and cannot be altered We do recommend all other data be saved including User Prompt 1 and User Prompt 2 if it has been recorded Notes Recorded caller names for the Caller Name Announcement System Personal cannot be saved by the above procedure only Caller ID numbers can be saved When the saved Caller ID numbers are loaded using LOAD command the following things should be 108 FINAL SETUP 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM done For System Caller Name Announcement 1 The Message Manager re records caller names see Recording System Caller Names in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES For Personal Caller Name Announcement 1 Subscribers need to delete the saved Caller ID numbers see 4 12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber s Guide 2 Re assign Caller ID numbers and re record caller names User Prompt files are very large and can take about 1 h to save Store saved files in a safe area FINAL SETUP 109 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM 110 FINAL SETUP Section 7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 111 71 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM
159. ase enter the person s mailbox number To enter by name press and 1 If you are using a rotary telephone stay on the line To call the operator press 0 2 Press X then Type the System Manager s Mailbox Number 99 999 9999 or 99999 Enter your password followed by 3 Type the Password followed by f The Main Menu of System Manager s Service will be played You have number new message s To receive the message press 1 To deliver a message press 2 To customise your mailbox press 3 To check the mailbox distribution press 4 For a system report press 5 For other features press 6 To end this call press 240 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES The System Manager s primary function is to create mailboxes for new Subscribers and to maintain system organization by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager cannot set up mailboxes and Sorry this function is not available is played Creating and Editing a Mailbox The System Manager is able to both create and edit Subscriber mailboxes Mailboxes can be created or edited by following the steps below At any step when editing an assigned mailbox s parameters change current settings by Pressing 1 To leave the current setting unchanged Press 2 When creating a ne
160. ason the prompts must match the programming that has been input 1 Access the Message Manager s mailbox 998 by dialling an extension connected to the VPS When the VPS answers Press 6 X998 to enter the Message Manager s mailbox Press 5 to modify messages Press 4 to change the Custom Service Menu Un You will hear Enter the Custom Service prompt number 1 through 100 To record Custom Service Exit prompt press 0 e Enter Custom Service number you want to record 7 You will hear Custom Service number entered number Record menu at the tone Follow the instructions until all Custom Service prompts have been recorded using the tree that you created as a guide 5 2 5 Checking Operation After you have entered and recorded all menus it is important to try the program yourself to see that all functions perform properly Dial into the system and try all the choices to see if you are routed correctly Verify that each menu choice works as it should 5 2 6 Voice Mail Voice Mail service is a message taking service that allows non subscribers to leave messages for subscribers This service is often assigned when incoming calls are answered by a live person This person can then send the caller to the Voice Mail service if desired Callers can access Voice Mail service by Voice Mail Port This service can be programmed independently of any or all ports of the VPS Callers reaching th
161. ation Top Menu Type 1 1 1 Mailbox number 1 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Mailbox number Mailbox setting Enter the mailbox number that is to be assigned to the interview mailbox This should be an existing mailbox number for the person who responds to the questions At 6 Interview Mailbox Number parameter enter a nonexistent mailbox number This will be the interview mailbox for this subscriber please make a written note of it for future reference It will not show up in Mailbox Listing If at a later time you want to delete the interview mailbox press backspace at 6 Interview Mailbox Number Exit System Administration Programming Record the questions by entering the subscriber s mailbox Call the VPS and Press 6 X the mailbox number assigned to the interview mailbox From the Main Menu Press 6 1 Note When using the Custom Service setting 1 digit can be assigned to go to the mailbox of the Interview Service The mailbox owner s message waiting lamp will go on for normal Voice Mail messages and for messages left in the separate interview mailbox 90 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS 5 2 10 Automated Attendant Automated Attendant service answers incoming calls and waits for the caller to input an extension number The caller is then transferred to the appropriate extension Callers can access Automated Attendant Service by Automated Attendant Port This service
162. ation in the mailbox after the extension intercepts the call during the Live Call Screening 1 Enter 620 for KX TA series or 617 or 616 for KX TD series from system program 2 Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output Jack No 3 Enter a jack number Screen output _ _ Stop Rec _ _ the jack number you entered Press the SELECT button AUTO ANSWER until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Repeat 4 5 and 6 until all jacks are programmed do 4 4 3 Live Call Screening Private Hands Free Mode Assignment This program assigns a VPS response for when a message is being left in a mailbox It determines whether an alert tone is sent or whether the recorded message is played through the built in speaker of the extension The default mode is hands free This is a station level program and should be done at each individual phone INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 65 44 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 1 Enter Station Programming For KX TA series With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX TD series Enter PITS programming a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PI PGM Mode 2 P
163. ator 1 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Enter Extension 2 Delete Extension 3 Extension Listing 3 Caller ID Listing 172 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE SYSTEM NAVIGATION 1 Enter 5 System 1 8 G 1 Parameter System Group es 2 Delete Setting Assignment Group 3 Listing 1 Enter 2 Extension Group 2 Delete 3 Listing 1 Day Service 2 Time Service 2 Lunch Service 3 Break Service 1 Enter 3 Holiday Setting 2 Delete 3 Listing 4 Daylight Saving Time 5 Prompt Setting 1 Enter 6 System caller Name Announce 2 Delete 3 Ca
164. ator 3 s mailbox 3 Disconnect message The caller is disconnected after playing Thank you for calling Notes An operator seeking call is always first transferred to Operator 1 The call is then transferred to Operator 2 and Operator 3 respectively depending on system programming Next Operator cannot be set for No Answer Coverage Mode of Operator 3 Same as Day Mode Same as Day Mode Same as Day Mode Operator s Parameters Night Mode Operator 1 2 3 Operator s Parameters Lunch Mode Operator 1 2 3 Operator s Parameters Break Mode Operator 1 2 3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 199 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Alternate Extension Assignment Used to assign extensions that should be transferred differently from the normal extension transfer sequence Calls to the extensions in this group will be transferred following the sequence defined by Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence See Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence in Table 70 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters shown To select the Alternate Extension Assignment Parameter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 Alternate Extension Group Enter The system can create up to 32 extensions that use the same alternate transfer sequence To select the Alternate Extension Enter Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 1
165. ause call state recognition is faster than with standard call progress tone detection The PBX code for each call state must be set in the Inband Signaling Parameters If PBX type is set to a KX T series telephone system the Inband Signaling Parameters will automatically default to the proper codes This is available with any of the following Panasonic KX T series telephone systems T1232 TA series T96 T336 TD816 TD1232 TD612 APT The VPS communicates with the PBX via the APT interface This is available only with Panasonic KX TA series DPT The VPS communicates with the PBX via the DPT interface This is available with any of the following Panasonic KX TD series telephone systems TD816 TD1232 TD612 If set to or DPT the extension numbers of VPS Port 1 and VPS Port 2 can be assigned in sub parameter Extension Number of VPS Port 1 2 5 digits 107 for KX TA series or 265 for KX TD816 1232 612 Specifies the extension number of VPS port 1 232 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table 69 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Extension 2 5 digits Specifies the extension number of VPS port 2 Number of 108 for KX TA VPS Port 2 series or 266 for KX TD816 1232 612 To program the following 10 Parameters on the following page use the Special Commands and Dial Codes listed below
166. ber A caller to the VPS who does not own a mailbox Notification Method See Message Waiting Notification Operator Up to three destinations can be assigned as operators This is the extension that receives calls when the calling party is on a rotary phone or dials 0 Owner s Name After a subscriber records his name his name will be announced during transfers Intercom Paging and confirmation of Dialling by Name Independent of this recording is registration of name by System Administrator This allows callers to dial parties by name Dialling by Name rather than by number For example a caller can dial S M I T Smith rather than Smith s mailbox number which can be hard to remember Password A number chosen by a subscriber or a manager to protect access to the mailbox Glossary Personal Greetings A subscriber can personalise his mailbox to greet callers There are 3 kinds of Personal Greetings 1 No Answer Greeting 2 Busy Signal Greeting 3 After Hours Greeting Personal Greeting for Caller ID Available with APT DPT Integration only Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting messages for calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers Each greeting supports up to 8 Caller ID numbers Personal Group Distribution List Each subscriber can have 4 distribution lists containing up to 20 mailboxes in each list Used to send the same message to a variety of people Port The point of connection between th
167. can be programmed independently of any or all ports of the VPS Callers reaching these ports access Automated Attendant service Service Access Command A caller can switch to Automated Attendant service by dialling 78 during a call Custom Service The call transfer service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service After pressing this key the caller enters Automated Attendant Service 5 2 11 Department Dialling Service Callers can access extensions by pressing a key 1 through 9 one touch dialling As a guide for the caller the Message Manager should record the Department Dialling Menu for example Thank you for calling For overseas travel press 1 For domestic travel press 2 For group travel press 3 5 2 12 Operator Service This service when enabled can be accessed via Voice Mail Rotary Telephone Service allows rotary callers to reach the General Delivery Mailbox or Operator Service Automated Attendant Dial 0 and your call will go to Operator Service Custom Service The Operator Service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service after pressing this key the caller enters Operator Service Operator Service can also be the destination of no DTMF input Operator Service offers callers many chances to reach a human operator Operator Service can be structured as a cascade so that if Operator 1 cannot take the call it goes to Operator 2 If that fails the call go
168. ce Settings Auto Attn Setting Menu Enter The Number 2 Program Service Settings Auto Attn Setting Operator s Parameters Menu 1 Day Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Lunch Mode 4 Break Mode SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY 1 Operator 1 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY Enter the data using the table below as a guide The table below is for Operator 1 as an example Please refer to it for Operators 2 and 3 for KX TA series or 9 for KX TD series Table 22 Description Value Range Description Function Default Operator 1 Disable Enables or disables operator service Service 2 Enable Enable Operator s 1 5 Digits Specifies the operator s extension Extension Operator s 2 5 Digits Specifies Operator 1 s mailbox number Also Mailbox No 998 specifies General Delivery Mailbox Operator No 10 60 s If a call transferred to Operator 1 2 or 3 is not Answer Time 30 answered within this period of time the VPS uses the No Answer Coverage Mode CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 95 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS Table 22 Description Value Range Description Function Default Busy 1 Hold Specifies the treatment of calls when Operator 1 is Coverage 2 No Answer Coverage busy If Call Waiting is chosen Operator 1 is Mode Dm signaled when another call is waiting using the Call Call Wait 3 i ae Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect M
169. ce it has been specified Editing Mailboxes The parameters of each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the Subscriber To access the proper menu for mailbox editing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No 1 174 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Table 34 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default The Extension 2 5 digits Used to transfer calls through the VPS to a Subscriber s of the Owner None mailbox Any valid extension number including an Extension Group List number can be assigned Note If an Extension Group List number is assigned to a mailbox all group members are able to share the information stored there Owner First Name Owner Last Name Up to 16 alphabetic characters None The first 4 letters of both the first and last name is printed on the Mailbox Assignments report The Dialling by Name feature uses the last name Class of Service No COS No 1 62 1 Used to define the set of services available to the Subscriber Note 1 We recommend that parameters for each COS number be defined before assigning a Class of Service COS number Note 2 COS No 63 pertains to the Message Manager while COS No 64 pertains to the System Manager These numbers cannot be entered in the COS No data field Covering Extension 2 5 digits N
170. ch Break Mode For example Custom Service Menu 16 for Night Mode might be Sorry we are closed for the day Our regular business hours are from 9 am to 5 pm Monday through Friday If you would like to leave a message press 1 now If you would like to send a fax press 2 now Record a similar message for the other languages in each mode 5 2 2 Custom Service Features Time Service 1 5 2 Set each day for the correct Day Night Lunch Break Mode Intercom Paging 1 5 7 7 This feature is only available with APT DPT Integration When needed change the paging code for each of the paging groups Example for KX TA series All sales telephones have been placed in extension group 3 in system program 600 Station Hunting feature is disabled in 100 Assign each CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 83 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS salesperson s mailbox to a different COS in the TVP50 and assign the paging group to that COS This tells the VPS which paging group to dial In the Intercom paging section assign the number 333 KX TA series or 633 KX TD series to the paging group assigned to the sales dept Fax Management 1 5 7 8 Assigns up to 2 fax machines that can be extensions from the PBX If the CNG tone is heard the KX TVP50 will automatically forward the call to the first fax machine If the first fax machine is busy or doesn t answer is out of paper the call is forwarded to the second fax machine Also allows as
171. cuit Type Signal Name Number EIA CCITT 1 Frame Ground AA 101 2 TXD Transmitted Data BA 103 3 RXD Received Data BB 104 4 RTS Request To Send CA 105 6 DSR Data Set Ready CC 107 INSTALLATION 37 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION Table 7 Pin Configuration of the EIA RS 232C Pin Circuit Type Signal Name Number EIA CCITT 7 SG Signal Ground AB 102 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect CF 109 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready CD 108 2 2 8 5 EIA RS 232C Signals Frame Ground FG Connects an external ground to the unit frame usually the earth pin of the AC power cord Transmitted Data TXD output Conveys signals from the unit to the terminal printer A mark condition is held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted Received Data RXD input Conveys signals from the terminal printer to the unit Request To Send RTS output This lead is held on whenever DSR is on Signal Ground SG Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals Data Terminal Ready DTR output This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that it is on line Circuit DTR ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the terminal printer It is switched off when the unit is off line INSTALLATION Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 39 3 1 GUI
172. d System Prompts in English By default User 1 and User 2 Prompts are not recorded Authorisation 1 Yes When set to Yes the Message Manager is able to utilise for Message the Message Waiting Notification feature The sub Notification Yes parameters to be set include Beeper Callback No Entry Mode MWL Notification for Unreceived Message and Device Notification for Unreceived Message If set to NO sub parameters cannot be assigned Beeper 1 Caller Permits the Message Manager to use the Callback Number Callback Select Entry feature No Entry 2 Without Mode P n Caller After recording a message the caller is asked EN Select if the message is urgent If urgent the caller is 5 Disable asked to enter the callback number Disable Without Without recording a message the caller is asked to enter the callback number Before Before recording a message the system asks the caller to enter the callback number After After recording a message the system asks the caller to enter the callback number Disable Disables the Callback Number Entry feature Note To utilise this feature the callback number entry code must be included in the Subscriber s beeper pager number When Disable is selected or if the caller does not enter a callback number System Callback No See Table 58 will be displayed on the beeper s pager s display If a caller s number is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service the cal
173. d when the destination is busy or if there is no answer Busy Delay 2 60 min Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS must wait 3 after a busy condition is received before trying to deliver the message again No Answer 2 120 min Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is to wait Delay 60 after a no answer condition is received before trying to deliver the message again Outgoing Call Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the External Message Ports 1 2 Delivery feature Message 1 6 min Specifies the allowable message length of external Length 3 delivery messages that the Subscriber can record Max Messages 1 100 msgs the maximum number of external delivery for Mailboxes 3 messages that can be stored in 1 mailbox System 1 9 min Specifies the maximum telephone connect time allowable External 3 for an external message delivery call Used to prevent Message excessive telephone charges Time begins when the Delivery destination number answers the call The VPS terminates Duration Time the call when the specified length of time has been exceeded However the VPS does not terminate a call until the whole message is played even though the specified time expires Callback Telephone No Up to 32 digits This telephone number is announced to the recipient as the telephone number to be called in order to retrieve the sender s message The VPS plays the callback telephone number to rec
174. e Press 2 Checking Mailbox Distribution This parameter is used to check if messages have been delivered to recipients 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 4 to check distribution status 3 Press 3 to cancel the message or delete verification SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 255 DELIVERING MESSAGES Note Listen to messages by Pressing 1 Check the previous message by Pressing 1 twice Check the next message by Pressing 2 4 Press 1 to delete verification of this message or 2 to cancel message delivery 256 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C7 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX C7 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX In order to ensure system security a password must be established consisting of up to 8 numeric characters Anyone requesting access to the System Manager s service will be required to enter this password before proceeding Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer this service cannot be accessed and Sorry this function is not available is played 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 3 to customise the mailbox The current setting will be played 3 Press 1 to change the mailbox password 4 Type the password and Press t Note If a password is not needed Press 7 It is recommended to set the password to maintain security 5 Press 2 to accept the entry SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 257 C8 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES C8 LI
175. e 1 Automated 1 Department Setting Attendant Dialing 2 Operator s Parameter 3 Alternate Extension _ 2 Custom Service SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 171 SYSTEM NAVIGATION Programming Menu Structure Diagram 1 Program 1 Mailbox Setting 1 Enter Edit 2 Delete 2 Class of Service 3 Password Reset 4 Mailbox Listing 3 Port Trunk Entry COS No 1 64 1 Mailbox No 1 Mailbox Entry Setting 2 Notification 1 1st Device Setting 2 2nd Device 3 3rd Device Day Mode for each port 1 Port Service Night Mode for each port Lunch Mode for each port Break Mode for each port Day Mode for each trunk group Night Mode for each trunk group Lunch Mode for each trunk group Break Mode for each trunk group Service 2 Trunk Service 4 Service 1 Automated 1 Department Setting Attendant Dialing 2 Operator s Parameter 1 Day Made 2 Night Mode 3 Lunch Mode 4 Break Mode 3 Alternate Extension 2 gostom Custom Service No 1 100 Entry 1 Enter 3 Caller ID Call Routing 2 Delete Continued Next Page 1 Oper
176. e 7 3 9 Report See 7 3 10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear See B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES Mailbox Usage See Section 1 Mailbox Setup in the Subscriber s Guide Message Delivery Internal allows the VPS to automatically deliver a single message to multiple mailboxes See Group Distribution List Personal Group Distribution List System and Message Delivery Status in this Table 158 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Message Delivery allows a subscriber to check the status of See3 2 Checking Mailbox Status messages that have been sent The sending Distribution in the Subscriber s subscriber has the option of canceling any of the messages after checking their status If a message has not been received the VPS will voice report the following when the message was recorded the destination mailbox number and the contents of the message Message delivery status information is automatically deleted after the message has been received by the subscriber or when the subscriber cancels the delivery or when a new message arrives after 84 delivery status messages have been stored in the subscriber s mailbox the oldest status message is always deleted first Guide Message Reception Mode allows incoming calls to be received by either a subscriber s regular or interview mailbox Th
177. e Mail See 5 2 10 Automated Attendant See 1 5 Service Access Commands in the Subscriber s Guide Special Feature Authorisation permits subscribers to use the following special features Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery and Auto Forwarding See Authorisation for Message Notification in Table 36 and 37 Authorisation for External Message Delivery and Authorisation for Auto Forwarding in Table 36 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS System Clock allows the correct setting of the date and time to be made for proper system operation See 7 2 4 Set Time TIME See 4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK See D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK System Reports Eight system reports are available to the System Administrator and System Manager to monitor VPS operating status These reports include Mailbox Assignments COS Assignments System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Flash Memory Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report and the Fax Call Report See 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS See C5 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS See System Report in Glossary SYSTEM FEATURES 165 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Time Service is a timer function that initiates the appropriate incoming call handling procedure in
178. e desired Beeper Callback Number Entry Mode 1 Caller Select Mode 2 Without message mode 3 Before message recording mode 4 After message recording mode 5 Disable Entry Mode Caller cannot access beeper pager C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 6 to accept it d The current setting of MWL Notification for Unreceived Message is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable e Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it f Thecurrent setting of Device Notification for Unreceived Message is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable g Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it 248 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS External Message Delivery Status 23 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If the External Message Delivery Status is enabled set the prompt mode for receiving External Delivery Messages go to Step 23 b below b The current prompt mode is played Press 1 2 3 or 4 to choose the desired mode 1 System Prompt 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt 4 Selective Prompt C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 5 to accept it Auto Forwarding Status 24 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If Auto Forwarding Status is enabled go to Step 24 b below b
179. e extension users Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the extension users by intercom Intercom Paging Covering Extension This can be a destination for Incomplete Call Handling Service Also it can be accessed by pressing 0 during the playing of a Personal Greeting Custom Service Setting Allows one touch access to extensions other custom service menus fax machine mailboxes etc A greeting can be recorded for each of the 100 menus to give verbal directions to the non subscriber Default Setting A parameter which was defined for the system at the factory and can be changed through system programming i e the System Administrator or the System Manager Delayed Ringing There are 2 kinds of delayed ringing applications 1 The VPS is used as the no answer destination for the Intercept Routing feature of your PBX 2 DIL 1 N outside CO line to several extensions terminates on telephones and VPS ports To give the telephone users a chance to answer calls the VPS lines should be programmed for delayed ringing Otherwise the VPS will answer the calls immediately Delivery Time The time specified by the subscriber for the VPS to deliver a prerecorded message Department Dialling A number 1 9 assigned to transfer an outside caller to a specific extension Glossary Direct Mailbox Access Available with APT DPT Integration only A subscriber can enter his mailbox directly when he calls the VPS from his e
180. e malfunctioning for APT DPT Integration because telephone lines are disconnected or Integration with PBX is not set to APT DPT Integration mode Error and Warning Indications During System Operation Table 28 Indication Meaning FLASH MEMORY STORAGE SPACE IS 80 or more of the Flash Memory voice NOW EXCEEDING 80 message save area is used ASCII TERMINAL program Load Error Error loading of ASCII terminal control program 7 2 7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device SAVE All system programming data and voice prompts 7 functional areas can be saved in separate data files To save this data a data terminal must be connected to the RS 232C port of the VPS Files must be saved individually The SAVE command must be executed for each data file It SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 119 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS will require several minutes to SAVE for all the data selected When performing this operation always wait until the process completion indication appears WARNING Never save back up and upload the Program without your dealer s support The memory required to save each data component is indicated below 1 Program approximately 1 Mbytes See Warning above 2 Parameters approximately 0 4 Mbytes System Configuration 3 System Prompts approximately 5 Mbytes Do not save prompts are saved as defaults in the flash memory Saving items 4
181. e telephone switch and the VPS Pound Sign The key on the telephone keypad Private Message A message which is delivered to a specific mailbox cannot be forwarded Prompt Prompts are pre recorded VPS sentences that guide subscribers and non subscribers through specific VPS operations The KX TVP50 supports 3 prompts 1 System prompts pre recorded by the factory in English 2 User 1 prompts freely recorded by the Message Manager and 3 User 2 prompts freely recorded by the Message Manager Review Plays back a message Rewind Replays the last 4 s of a message Rotary Telephone A telephone capable of pulse dial only Callers using a rotary telephone will be automatically forwarded to the operator or the General Delivery Mailbox Glossary 327 SAVE One of the utility commands It is used to save VPS data to a personal computer Scanning Messages Allows the subscriber to listen to only the first 4 s of each message Another method is to use the digit 2 while listening to a message this advises the VPS to skip to the next message Station Programming Programming via the proprietary telephone Subscriber A person who has an assigned mailbox System Administration System programming from a personal computer System Administrator Unlike the Message Manager and the System Manager the System Administrator has full system programming capability He uses a computer connected to the RS 232C port of
182. e used simultaneously 7 3 6 Port Usage Statistics Clear Clears the Port Usage Report for use again To clear the Port Usage Statistics Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 1 System Reports System Report Clear Port Usage Statistics Clear May I clear a port usage report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Port Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 7 3 7 Flash Memory Usage Report The Flash Memory Usage Report indicates the amount of flash memory storage used and the flash memory availability in minutes It also presents the following statistics The number of messages that were recorded by callers and were copied since the last clearing of this report The number of messages that were copied since the last clearing of this report SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 133 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS The number of messages that were deleted by subscribers and expired and were removed by the system since the last clearing of this report The number of messages that expired and were removed by the system since the last clearing of this report To select the Flash Memory Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 6 Flash Memory Usage Report 4 JAN 1999 7 46 PM Drive Avail Used 1 118 min 2
183. ect a 3 User 2 Prompt Selection Number while Multilingual selection System menu message is being played Delayed 0 15 s Specifies whether the port answers immediately 0 or Answer 0 with delay 1 15 s Time Port 1 Night Mode To select the Night Mode Features for port 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 2 Port 1 Lunch Mode To select the Lunch Mode Features for port 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Port 1 Break Mode To select the Break Mode Features for port 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 4 Note The port assignment procedure for Port 2 is the same as Port 1 4 2 Trunk Group Assignment This assignment is effective only with APT DPT Integration To select the Day Night Lunch or Break Mode for the selected PBX outside line trunk group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 24 Trunk 1 Day Mode To select the Day Mode Features for PBX outside line trunk group 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 1 Table 39 Parameter Value Range Description F
184. ed Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Note Before you start setting or changing system parameters we recommend that you turn off the Call Progression Mode with the OFLN command While off the power LED of the VPS will flash and the VPS will not answer any incoming calls After you finish programming use the ONLN command to turn on the Call Progression Mode normal operation Please see 7 2 1 Off line Set OFLN and 7 2 2 On line Set ONLN for more details Trademarks HyperTerminal is registered trademark of HILGRAEVE INCORPORATED IBM is registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Procomm Plus is registered trademark of DATASTORM TECHNOLOGIES INC Smartcom is registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products Inc Important Information 5 Table of Contents 1 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 11 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO scsccsscsssssssscssssssscsssssnssessscsesessorees 12 Tact Why Voice Processing es e EE ve ee entran 12 LEZ Basic Operations cete a Ae Uem eee 12 11 3 Limitations Jic nemen Hee CR ree eee heec 13 1 2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND 0 14 1 24 System Administration uec ecce e tee re Woe ceret etti te ee dae 14 1 2 2 System Managetnen
185. ed Inband Integration allows the PBX to send certain digits DTMF to the VPS allowing it to recognise the status of the extension and take the appropriate action Table 8 VPS PBX COMMUNICATION PBX to VPS VPS to PBX Call Progress Tones SLT Signals ringback on off hook busy hookswitch flash reorder DTMF tones DTMF Tones The VPS must also have access to certain PBX features For example if the VPS takes a message one way it can notify the mailbox owner is by dialling the PBX s Message Waiting Lamp On code Once new messages are retrieved the VPS dials the Message Waiting Lamp Off code for that same mailbox owner 40 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration The PBX must have certain capabilities and features to work with the VPS Although this section includes tests to help you evaluate the PBX it may be necessary to refer to the PBX s documentation for detailed capability and feature descriptions Single Line Tip Ring Port Circuits The VPS can only be connected to a PBX that supports SLT sets Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this connection However some OPX cards do not provide all the capabilities listed in this section Following are the minimum current and voltages that the PBX must supply Table 9 Minimum Loop Current 20 mA Minimum Line Voltage 7V DC Minimum Ringing Voltage 40 V AC
186. elected a menu choice This parameter is used only if Call Transfer Anytime is set to Ext or Mbx No DTMF a f Specifies how a call is treated when there is no response Input c to the menu message No response usually indicates Operation See Keypad that the caller is using a rotary phone The factory Assignment on the setting is C Operator which allows the caller to be next page automatically connected to an operator after message playback 202 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table 45 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Keypad a n Any of the 14 services listed below a n can be Assignment X d 0 c assigned to the 0 through 9 and keys on the 0 9 X Others None telephone keypad Callers are able to access these services by pressing the corresponding keys on their telephones a Transfer to Mailbox Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific mailbox Enter a followed by a mailbox number b Transfer to Extension Transfers the caller to a specific extension Enter b followed by an extension number c Operator Connects the caller to the operator d Exit Plays a final guidance message and disconnects The message must be recorded by the Message Manager e Previous Menu If programmed allows the caller access to a previous Custom Service Menu f Custom Service If programmed all
187. er These menus can be recorded in various foreign languages and help guide outside callers to the desired extension mailbox System Group Distribution List Department Dialling menu operator fax machine etc See 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS See 6 1 3 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6 998 5 4 See 7 2 11 Custom Service Report CREP See 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR See B5 2 Custom Service See Recording Menus and Voice Labels in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Custom Service Setting in Glossary Daylight Saving Time Assignment changes the internal clock of the VPS for the start and end of Daylight Saving Time See B6 4 Daylight Saving Time DST SYSTEM FEATURES 149 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Department Dialling is a speed dialling function that permits the caller to quickly reach the desired extension by dialling a 1 digit number either during or after the playing of the Department Dialling message See 5 4 2 Department Dialling See Department Dialing in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Recording Menus and Voice Labels in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Department Dialling in Glossary Integration Only number Dialling by Name allows the caller to reach the intended See Owner Name in Table 34 mailbox extension when the number is not inB2 SYSTE
188. er ID If these features cannot be used confirm your PBX software version and consult your dealer From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 116 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE 60 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 43 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 c Enter the system number 0 or 1 master slave The system displays the ROM version and the date it was created This version must be higher than the required version for Digital Integration to be utilised both systems if system connection is used 2 Set the date and time using System Program 000 Date and time are automatically synchronised between the VPS and the Panasonic KX TD series telephone systems during initial setup 3 Set PBX extension numbering using System Program 003 4 Assign the Voice Mail Port This program tells the PBX which jack will be connected to the VPS This allows the PBX to send the proper Digital Integration information to those ports e KX TVP50 2 ports assign 1 jack Note If you are configuring a 2 cabinet system all Voice Mail Ports should be assigned to either the Master or Slave System From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 126 or 117 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output M Enter the jack number of the port you will use for the Voice Mail 02 64 d Press STORE e Press END HOLD when finis
189. er Name Announcement the VPS will use the personal caller name To utilise this feature follow the procedure below 1 Go to the System Administration Top Menu and type 1 2 Program Class of Service and COS No 1 62 Select an Intercom Paging Group 1 9 for this COS If set to Group 9 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups 2 From the System Administration Top Menu type 1 5 7 7 Program System Parameter Setting Others Intercom Paging Parameters Adjust the No Answer Time for Intercom Paging to your preference the default is 5 s For the Intercom Paging Group you selected in Step 1 set the Intercom Paging access code in Paging Code for Group 1 8 and Paging Code for All Groups For example the access code for external paging by a KX TD612 PBX is 64 Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Intercom Paging permits callers to page subscribers by PBX See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR APT DPT paging there are different kinds of PBX DIGITAL INTEGRATION See Intercom Paging 1 5 7 7 in 5 2 2 Custom Service Features See Intercom Paging Group in Table 36 in SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Intercom Paging Parameter in B6 7 Other Parameters See Intercom Paging in Glossary SYSTEM FEATURES 155 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Interview Service
190. er s Mailbox by specifying the password and the extension numbers of Operator 1 2 and 3 Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer this service cannot be accessed and Sorry this function is not available is played Message Manager s Password The password can be specified at any time using the telephone The password contains up to 8 numeric characters and must be entered to execute the message management operation Operator s Extensions When callers require help they are transferred to an operator extension after Pressing 0 on their telephone keypad Up to 3 operators Operator 1 2 3 can be specified for Day Night Lunch and Break Modes The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 3 to customise Mailbox 3 The VPS plays the current password setting Press 1 to change the password If a password has not yet been assigned go to Step 4 Accept the current setting by Pressing 2 4 Type the password and Press t 5 The VPS repeats what was entered Press 2 to accept the entry 6 The VPS plays the current operator s extension setting Press 1 to change or assign the operator s extension Accept the current setting by Pressing 2 To delete the current setting Press 3 and go to step 8 Note Operator 1 s extension number cannot be deleted MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 265 D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGE
191. er s needs Work with the owner manager and receptionist to build the Custom Service Greetings and Holiday Greetings Figure out which ports are to be answered by which greetings Check the software level of the telephone switch 2 Use System Administration and your computer for the startup sequence 3 After the system is on line disconnect the outside CO lines going into the system until the greetings have been completed 4 Work with the receptionist to record the system greetings It s important to spend time training the receptionist Making sure that the receptionist understands the system and can answer basic questions will save you time in the end Show the receptionist how to transfer general delivery mailbox messages 5 1 2 Quick Setup Quick Setup provides a quick way to set the following programming items Each of these must be initially set to start the VPS operation Note Quick Setup requires VT100 emulation software PBX type Extension numbers of VPS ports Extension numbers for mailboxes Creating mailboxes Password setting 1 2 3 4 5 Port service setting 6 7 Date and time setting 8 Activating the Quick Setup 74 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 1 STARTING UP Depending on your PBX type some steps will be skipped as shown below Table 17 PBX Type Required Procedures KX T308 T616 1 52 53 4 5 6 7 8 KX T123210 T336 T96 Non Pana
192. erator 3 Any Extension None valid extension number can be assigned Operator s 2 5 digits Used to specify the mailbox number for Operator 3 Mailbox No None Callers to Operator 3 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set 198 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table 43 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how calls are handled when the Operator 3 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 3 Call Waiting Hold The caller is automatically placed on hold and 4 Disconnect the Operator 3 extension is called again 2 No Answer Coverage The caller is offered one of the Hole options specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode 3 Call Waiting Operator 3 is signaled when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message The VPS disconnects the call after playing Thank you for calling No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how Operator 3 calls are handled when not Coverage 2 Leave Message answered within the time period set through the Mode 3 Disconnect Operator No Answer Time mode Message Caller Select 1 Caller Select This selection allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension 2 Leave Message The caller is instructed to leave a message in Oper
193. ering calls not answered by the operator Operator Backup Flexible Ringing Assignment For each applicable outside CO line use System Programs 408 Day Mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing at the operator s extension jack Delayed Ringing Assignment To give the operator time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension connected to the KX TVP50 Use System Programs 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each applicable outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter c If the KX TVP50 is only answering calls not answered by user extensions Flexible Ringing Assignment For each applicable outside CO line use System Programs 408 Day Mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing on every extension jack that you want to have ring Delayed Ringing Assignment To give users time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension connected to the KX TVP50 Use System Programs 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each applicable outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this para
194. ers including external parties at the same time This feature also permits the receiver to reply to the message without having to specify the mailbox number COS programming determines whether this feature can be used or not See Authorisation for External Message Delivery in Table 36 inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters External Message Delivery in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in Glossary See 3 4 Sending External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See 3 5 Receiving External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See 3 6 Replying to External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide External Message Delivery Status allows the subscriber to check the status of undelivered and pending external delivery messages This feature is only available when External Message Delivery has been authorised for the subscriber s COS See External Message Delivery Service in this Table See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in Glossary See 3 7 Checking and Setting External Message Delivery Status in the Subscriber s Guide 152 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FE
195. es to Operator 3 If that fails the caller can record a message At each stage there are other options for busy cases and no answer cases Operator Service can be programmed differently for Day Night Lunch Break Mode Each operator can be assigned a mailbox for message taking CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 91 5 3 SETTING PORTS 5 3 SETTING PORTS 5 3 1 Port Service Menu Access the Port Service Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 2 1 Program Enter The Number 2 3 Port Trunk Service Enter The Number 2 1 Port Service Screen output Program Port Trunk Service Port Service Enter the Port Number 1 2 from Program Port Trunk Service Port Service Menu Enter the data using the table below as a guide 3 Interview 4 Custom Auto Attn Table 21 Description Value Range Description Function Default Incoming Call 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Service 2 Auto Attn Notes When you specify the Interview Service one of Subscriber s Interview mailbox numbers should also be specified When you specify the Custom Service one of 100 1 100 Custom Service numbers should also be specified Incoming Call Service Prompt 1 System 2 User 1 3 User 2 4 Selective User 1 Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on this port Notes This parameter is not valid
196. escription Function Default Description Up to 32 The information typed in this field is for reference only characters Any ASCII character except can be used None Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language of sevices within Custom 2 User 1 Service 3 User 2 System Note This parameter overrides Incoming Call Service Prompt Menu Repeat 1 3 times Specifies the number of times Custom Service menu Cycle 3 messages are repeated to the caller Call Transfer Extn Mbx No Specifies the destination to which the call is transferred Anytime Extn The Extn setting enter E enables callers to be transferred directly to their intended party by dialling the extension number The Mbx setting enter M enables callers to leave messages in a mailbox by entering the mailbox number The No setting enter N disables extension transfer and mailbox transfer only 1 digit entries work following the Custom Service menu SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 201 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table 45 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Wait for 1 5 s Resolves the problem when the first digit of the Second Digit 1 extension or mailbox number is the same as one of the Custom Service menu choices The VPS waits the specified period of time for a second digit to be dialled If the time period expires without a second digit being entered the system assumes the caller has s
197. ese ports immediately access Voice Mail service Service Access Command A caller can switch to Voice Mail service by dialling 6 during a call Custom Service This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service After pressing this key the caller enters Voice Mail service 88 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS 5 27 Mailbox Groups This program allows a message to be delivered to several mailboxes at the same time The message activates the message waiting lamps on all of the proprietary telephones These mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List A voice label can be recorded for each System Group Distribution List this is done by the Message Manager see D6 RECORDING MESSAGES There are 20 group lists available and each group list can have up to 20 entries each To establish a mailbox group 1 From the System Administration Top Menu Type 1 5 1 1 1 Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Mailbox Group Enter 2 Assign a list number to the Mailbox Group This number can be from 2 5 digits same as mailbox numbers It has to be an unused number In other words the number assigned to this group cannot be the same as another System Group Distribution List number or mailbox number For example we ll use the number 250 There are 2 ways to use a System Group Distribution List Option A For inside messages The System Group
198. essage Hold No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies the treatment of calls when Operator 1 Coverage 2 Leave Message does not answer When Caller select is chosen Mode and the Operator does not answer the caller will 3 Disconnect Message hear the following menu message Sorry no one is 4 Next Operator available to answer the call To leave a message Caller Select Press 1 To enter another extension Press 2 Leave Message means the caller will be sent to the General Delivery Mailbox Message 1 3 Times Specifies the number of times the VPS plays the Repeat Cycle 3 Automated Attendant top menu to the caller Tf more than 1 operator is assigned we recommend to reduce the time on the Operator No Answer Time to 15 s 96 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES 5 5 1 Mailbox Setting Menu Access the Mailbox Setting Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Program Menu Enter The Number 1 Mailbox Setting Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit 2 Delete 3 Password Reset 4 Mailbox Listing 5 5 2 Entering a Mailbox From Mailbox Setting Enter The Number 1 Enter the Mailbox number Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Menu 1 Mailbox Setting 2 Notification Setting Enter The Number 1 Enter the data using the following table as a guide Table 23 i Value Range Nn
199. eter report press 5 To generate call account report press 6 To generate class of service parameter report press 7 To generate fax call report press 8 689 To go directly to a question press 4 627 748 749 689 644 748 749 689 681 748 749 689 748 749 689 690 To hold this call press 2 268 711 690 268 711 690 275 691 To insert a pager display command 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 press 8 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 692 To insert a pause press 5 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 647 603 733 608 692 693 603 733 608 692 693 691 603 733 608 692 740 693 603 733 608 692 740 693 693 To insert a wait for dial tone press 7 647 647 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 mm 694 To keep press 2 659 694 658 694 695 To leave a message press 1 695 695 673 308 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 696 To let the caller select prompt 759 760 761 696 605 language press 4 697 T
200. etermines the mailboxes that can use this feature Messages marked as private cannot be forwarded See Private Message in this Table See Authorisation for Auto Forwarding in Table 36 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Auto Forwarding in Glossary Automated answers incoming calls and routes those calls e See 5 2 10 Automated Attendant to the desired extension The service can be Attendant assigned on a port by port basis and day See54 AUTOMATED night basis ATTENDANT PARAMETERS e See B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Automated Attendant in Glossary Broadcasting permit the system manager to deliver the e See Delivering Messages to All Messages same message to all VPS subscribers at the Mailboxes Broadcasting same time This feature is only available to the system manager Messages in C6 DELIVERING MESSAGES Busy Coverage Mode specifies how calls to the operator will be handled when the line is busy The Busy Coverage options that are available include Hold No Answer Coverage Call Waiting and Disconnect Message See Busy Coverage Mode in Table 22 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See Busy Coverage Mode in Table 41 42 and 43 in B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS SYSTEM FEATURES 145 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DES
201. eturning to top menu automated 445 attendant service disabled 446 Returning to top menu automated 446 attendant service enabled 447 right away 161 447 448 SATURDAY 448 449 Saved message retention time is day 449 70 450 Saved message retention time is 450 unlimited 451 SECOND 451 452 Second telephone number is 452 telephone number 453 Second telephone number is not 453 assigned 294 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 454 seconds 454 14 454 407 454 455 Selection Menu 455 456 Selection menu erased 456 457 Selection menu is selection menu 457 458 Sending report now to terminal or 458 printer connected to RS 232 port 459 SEPTEMBER 459 460 Set the answer length using the 460 following options For 4 seconds press 1 For 8 seconds press 2 For 16 seconds press 3 For 32 seconds press 4 461 SEVEN 461 462 SEVEN HOUR 462 463 SEVEN MINUTE 463 464 SEVENTEEN 464 465 SEVENTEEN HOUR 465 466 SEVENTEEN MINUTE 466 467 SEVENTEENTH 467 468 SEVENTH 468 469 SEVENTY 469 470 SEVENTY EIGHT 470 471 SEVENTY FIVE 471 472 SEVENTY FOUR 472 473 SEVENTY NINE 473 474 SEVENTY ONE 474 475 SEVENTY SEVEN 475 476 SEVENTY SIX 476 477 SEVENTY THREE 47
202. f outgoing calling sequences reaches 64 the first 10 items are automatically sent to the terminal Any information sent to the terminal is automatically deleted from the system s memory To select the Call Account Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 4 Call Account MBOX 111 4 JAN 7 46 MBOX 116 7 JAN 2 26 MBOX 114 7 JAN 5 06 MBOX 118 8 JAN 9 07 MBOX 112 8 JAN 10 24 14 NOV 1999 3 40 PM PM 00 01 32 DIAL 811111111 PM 00 03 32 DIAL 812222222 PM 00 02 45 DIAL 813333333 AM 00 01 15 DIAL 814444444 AM 00 04 51 DIAL 815555555 7 3 5 Port Usage Report The Port Usage Report provides information about port usage and allows system and port traffic to be measured The report includes the accumulated duration times of incoming and outgoing calling services and the total connect time for each port 132 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS To select the Port Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 5 Port Usage Report 4 JAN 1999 7 46 PM FROM 3 JAN 1999 9 53 AM Port ED MN Rev Connect Time 1 8 0 84 02 10 19 2 4 0 21 00 18 54 Total 9 0 105 02 39 13 Full line Time 00 10 15 FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report ED External Delivery MN Message Notification Rcv Receive Full line Time The total time that both Port 1 and Port 2 wer
203. fies the length of time the hook switch must be 2 300 ms pressed before the PBX will recognise it as a flash hook 3 600 ms signal See the PBX manual to determine the correct 4 900 ms value 100 CPC Signal 1 None Specifies the minimum time necessary to detect an 2 6 5 ms interruption in the CPC Calling Party Control signal 3 150 ms received from the PBX The VPS is able to determine 4 300 ms that the line has been disconnected when an 5 450 ms interruption of the CPC signal has been detected 6 600 ms None Disconnect 1 8s Specifies the length of time the line is temporarily Time 2 unavailable after a call has ended Dial Mode 1 Specifies the dial mode for DTMF or Pulse If Pulse is 2 Pulse 10 pps specified pulse speed 10 20 pps must be selected 3 Pulse 20 pps DTMP Note This setting only affects outward dialling from the VPS The VPS can only receive DTMF signals Note The port assignment procedure for Port 2 is the same as Port 1 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 229 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Three separate parameters are used to program the VPS for optimal signalling and performance with the PBX To select PBX Interface Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 Dialing Parameters These parameters specify how the VPS will initiate and control call transfers setup outgoing calls
204. form system manager 508 415 499 388 415 416 Please leave a message at the tone 416 417 Please wait a moment 417 49 417 418 PM 418 419 POUND 419 420 Prompt mode for external message 420 delivery is caller select 421 Prompt mode for external message 421 delivery is system 422 Prompt mode for external message 422 delivery is user 1 423 Prompt mode for external message 423 delivery is user 2 424 Prompt mode is system 424 425 Prompt mode is user 1 425 426 Prompt mode is user 2 426 427 Prompt number number 427 428 Prompt restored 428 429 PULSE DIALLING MODE 429 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 293 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 430 Question erased 430 431 Question number number 431 432 received on date 304 432 17 433 Record caller name at the tone 433 434 Record company name at the tone 434 435 Record greeting at the tone 435 436 Record label at the tone 436 437 Record menu at the tone 437 438 Record owner s name at the tone 438 439 Record the group name at the tone 439 440 Record the prompt at the tone 440 441 Record the question at the tone 441 442 Record the recipient s name at the 442 tone 443 Record your name at the tone 443 444 Recording accepted 444 445 R
205. forwarding or transferring a call to the VPS a PBX with Follow on ID sends the mailbox number of the called subscriber to the VPS before connecting the caller The VPS responds by playing that subscriber s personal greeting This operation is sometimes called Call Forward to Mailbox Without this feature the VPS cannot immediately play the greeting when the line is busy or there is no answer and allow the caller to leave a message 42 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS 3 21 General Guidelines and Definitions Optimal performance of the VPS PBX system relies on proper VPS programming There are 3 categories of hardware settings RS 232C Port Settings and PBX Interface Parameters Entering a number sets some of the parameters while others use sequence codes 3 2 2 RS 232C Settings Baud Rate 300 38400 Specifies the bits per second the speed at which the data is transferred Word Bit Length 7 8 Defines the number of bits in each byte or character e Parity E Specifies the parity used for error detection Stop Bit Length 1 2 Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte Default 9600 8 N 1 3 2 3 Port Settings There is no need to change these in a typical installation Each port on the VPS should be matched to the type of signalling the PBX expects If you need to change these
206. g Lamp at an extension None Message Waiting Lamp Light Off This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must perform to Sequence for disable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension None Message Waiting Lamp Call Waiting This sequence is carried out by the VPS when performing Se 2 ll waiting j quence call waiting if the extension being called is busy Release This sequence is performed by the VPS to release call Sequence for F waiting Call Waiting Inband Signaling Parameters These parameters are used if the PBX sends DTMF tones to the VPS to indicate the state of a call busy answered disconnected etc The integration Mode must be set to Inband If PBX type is set to a KX T series telephone system the Inband Signaling parameters will automatically default to the proper codes To select Inband Signaling Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 2 The following parameters can be programmed using 0 9 X and A D Table 71 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Ringback 1 Indicates Ringback Tone Sent to the VPS when the extension dialled is ringing Busy 2 Indicates Busy Tone Sent to the VPS when the extension dialled is busy 234 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table 71 Parameter Value Range De
207. g automatically illuminates the message See Message Waiting Notification Lamp waiting lamp on the subscriber s telephone Notification from an SLT in when there are unplayed messages waiting in 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for the mailbox Integration e See 7 2 13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL See MWL Notification for Unreceived Message in Table 36and37in SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Parameters SeeC3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS SeeD3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION e See Message Waiting Lamp in Glossary e See4 8 Message Waiting Notification in the Subscriber s Guide Multilingual Service permits up to 3 languages to be used for See Incoming Call Service prompt options If the Selective mode is Prompt in Table 21 in selected callers are able to choose their 5 3 1 Port Service Menu desired language See Recording Menus and Voice Labels and Recording User Prompts in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Multilingual Selection Menu in Glossary SYSTEM FEATURES 161 Al SYSTEM FEATURES answered within the specified Operator No Answer Time These options include Caller Select caller may leave a message or call another extension Leave Message caller may leave a message in Operators mailbox Disconnect
208. g to the VPS 196 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 2 Operator seeking calls are received at Operator 2 when Operator 1 is busy or does not answer and Operator 1 s parameters are set as follows Busy Coverage Mode No Answer Coverage No Answer Coverage Mode Next Operator To select Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 2 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 2 Table 42 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator s 1 5 digits Used to select the extension number for Operator 2 Any Extension None valid extension number can be assigned Operator s 2 5 digits Used to specify the mailbox number for Operator 2 Mailbox No None Callers to Operator 2 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how calls are handled when the Operator 2 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect Message Hold 1 Hold The caller is automatically placed on hold and the Operator 2 extension is called again 2 No Answer Coverage The caller is offered one of the options specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode 3 Call Waiting Operator 2 is signaled when another call is waiting using the Call
209. gas leak in the vicinity of the leak WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE Important Information 3 The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the back of the unit You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft MODEL NO SERIAL NO For your future reference DATE OF PURCHASE NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS DEALER S TEL NO WARNING THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS BECOMING ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS Important Information THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET OUTLET IS LOCATED INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replac
210. ger 307 308 Message from the system manager 308 309 Message length is time 309 332 310 Message Manager 310 311 Message notification disabled 311 312 Message notification enabled 312 313 Message reception mode is interview 313 mode 314 Message reception mode is message 314 recording mode 315 Message reception mode is set to 315 interview mode 316 Message reception mode is set to 316 message recording mode 317 Message recorded by mailbox 317 13 12 number 318 Message recorded on date 318 17 318 17 197 259 319 Message retrieval order is first in 319 first out 320 Message retrieval order is last in 320 first out 321 Message scanning with information 321 is disabled 322 Message scanning with information 322 is enabled 288 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 323 Message sent on date 323 17 197 259 323 17 197 258 324 Message to name 324 31 325 Message transferred via mailbox 325 12 number 326 Message waiting lamp notification 326 disabled 327 Message waiting lamp notification _ 327 enabled 328 Message waiting lamp notification _ 328 for unreceived message disabled 329 Message waiting lamp notification _ 329 for unrece
211. ging Group Number 17 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current number b Type the group number 1 9 c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Note If set to 9 Group 9 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups 1 8 Subscriber Service Prompt Mode 18 a The current setting is played Press 1 2 or 3 to change the desired mode 1 System Prompt 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 4 to accept it Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement 19 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the current number b Type the number of Caller IDs 0 30 C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 247 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID 20 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Caller ID Screening 21 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Notification Status 22 a The current setting is played Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If the Message Notification Status is enabled go to Step 22 b below b Press 1 2 3 4 or 5 to choose th
212. h back to position 0 CAUTION If the DIP switch is not reset to position 0 after initialisation all programming will be lost when the voice processor loses power INSTALLATION 29 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS 4 Perform Quick Setup See Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 Check Quick Setup The Power Indicator on the Voice Processor should be solid The screen output should be On Line If you do not see the On Line message check the following The line cord to the Voice Processor has 4 conductors The programming on the KX TA series is correctly set in system Program 130 or 130 and 131 The programming on the KX TD816 1232 is correctly set in System Program 126 or 117 e The programming on the KX TD612 is correctly set in System Program 126 6 Set up Class of Service COS for each user customise voice prompts if necessary See Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 7 Perform Administrative Program through a computer See Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE CAUTION Do not turn the power off while the VPS is activated so as not to cause malfunction To turn the power off after installing the VPS unplug the power cord from the VPS a few minutes after disconnecting station wire s 30 INSTALLATION 2 6 INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL EXPANSION MEMORY CARD KX TVP52 2 6 INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL EXPANSION MEMORY CARD 52 2 6 1 General
213. hange your number 821 You can add up to number 821 335 821 334 822 You can enter up to number 411 822 82 411 822 82 820 121 822 82 823 You can not add any more digits 823 824 You have number 824 340 824 330 824 164 825 You have a call 825 826 You have a call from name 826 827 You have 1 FAX message 827 828 You have 1 message 828 829 You have 1 new message 829 316 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 830 ZERO 830 831 Break mode first operator s extension 831 is extension number 832 Break mode first operator s extension 832 is not assigned 833 Break mode second operator s 833 extension is extension number 834 Break mode second operator s 834 extension is not assigned 835 Break mode third operator s 835 extension is extension number 836 Break mode third operator s 836 extension is not assigned 837 Lunch mode first operator s extension 837 15 extension number 838 Lunch mode first operator s extension 838 is not assigned 839 Lunch mode second operator s 839 extension is extension number 840 Lunch mode second operator s 840 extension is not assigned 841 Lunch mode third operator s 841 extension is extension number 842 Lunch mode third operator s 842 extensi
214. hat have a fixed Follow on ID sequence to be used with the KX 50 For example a Follow on ID sequence of X X 201 can be changed to 6201 by using these parameters Inter Digit Time Out This parameter defines the interval of incoming signals Follow on ID from the PBX to the VPS The Digit Translation Table applies the digits received within this time to translation Input Output up to 8 alphanumeric characters When the system receives digits within the inter digit time it checks them against the input table If they are found the system utilises the output digits in their place The Remainder of this section consists of step by step guides for software verification and programming of the recommended Panasonic PBX systems 46 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs 3 3 1 KX TVP50 Programming for Inband Integration Set parameters from the System Administration Terminal The table below lists recommended parameters for Panasonic KX T series PBXs Table 12 PBX Type Other T308 T1232 T96 T336 TD816 TD308 TA series Manufacturers T616 1232 612 Integration Mode None None None None None None None None Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Operator Transfer FX A
215. he LOAD command must be executed for each data file When performing this operation always wait until the process completion indication appears before proceeding 1 Type LOAD then Press RETURN LOAD VPS Flash Memory Data Load PC gt VPS Xmodem 1 Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 Custom Service Menu 7 Personal Greetings Select No 2 Select the item to be restored to the flash memory then Press RETURN To start press RETURN 3 Press RETURN Start Load When CCC appears the VPS is ready for loading 4 Set the data terminal to the sending Call mode Xmodem Then enter the backup filename Press ENTER The backup data will be restored to the flash memory 5 When the parameter load has been completed power off and restart the system Note The data terminal used must be equipped with communications software that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol The command can be cancelled by Typing before entering the sending mode Once the sending mode has been selected use the cancel command of the communication software being used SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 121 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 7 2 9 Print All of the VPS Parameters GPRN This command is used to print all VPS parameter settings output to screen Type GPRN then Press RETURN GPRN All Parameters Mailb
216. hed Conditions Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port A jack programmed as a Manager Extension System Program 006 cannot be used in this program 5 Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering System Program 127 or 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment is automatically set This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port Since the jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions this enables you to assign extension numbers to each port You can assign any extension number that is not already assigned to another port To reach the VPS users dial these extension numbers It is not necessary to change the default programming for the extensions 265 and 266 or 165 and 166 From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 127 or 118 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 61 4 3 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 1232 KX TD612 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output VM NO Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output VM 01 2 _ 1 265 or 165 _ the port number you entered in program 126 or 117 d Enter the extension number that you want this port to have The default extension number for port 1 265 or 165 port 2 266 or 166 e Press STORE f Repeat c d and e until all extension numbers are entered Conditions 2 jacks on the system have the sa
217. hen the start up has been successful The delay varies according to the system s condition b ON LINE MODE is displayed System prompt gt is displayed on the screen To enter system administration Press ENTER All parameters can be set through the menu driven program 11 If you have not done so already adjust the VPS parameters to your PBX Follow these steps a Disconnect the power to the VPS and set the DIP switch to position 7 Power up again b Select your country PBX see computer screen Disconnect the power to the VPS and set the DIP switch to position 0 Power up again 12 Go to the System Administration Top Menu Type 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions 58 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 42 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA series CAUTION When 2 VPSs are connected to the KX TA series the following 2 procedures should be done to make the VPSs work correctly 1 Delete a mailbox in either VPS so that each extension has only ONE MAILBOX After Auto Configuration has been executed an extension has a mailbox in both VPS1 and VPS2 However each extension can have a maximum of 1 mailbox in either VPS To delete a mailbox Type D Delete in the Make Delete field see Step 4 Creating Mailboxes in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup The
218. hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode 2 Press the Flexible CO DSS button you want to assign as a Live Call Screening Cancel button 3 Press 93 for KX TA series or 86 for KX TD series Screen output LCS Cancel 4 Press STORE The STORE indicator light turns on The display shows the initial programming mode 5 Exit the program mode For KX TA series Set the MEMORY switch to SET on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series For KX TD series Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 67 44 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES The Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment is optional Live Call Screening can also be cancelled by Pressing the FLASH button 4 4 6 Live Call Screening Password Assignment To allow the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension the extension must have the LCS button lit To light this button on the phone press the LCS button then enter the password This password prevents others from activating the LCS feature and listening to the messages as they are being left It is not necessary to enter Station Programming to activate this feature 1 Lift the handset or Press the SP PHONE button 2 Press the feature number 77 X for KX TA series or 799 for KX TD series 3 For KX TA series Pres
219. ice settings See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement and Caller ID Screening in Table 36inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Caller Name Announcement System Personal in Glossary See 4 12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber s Guide Caller Name Announcement System APT DPT Integration Only allows the System Administrator to assign up to 120 Caller ID numbers Each Caller ID number can have a caller name recorded by the Message Manager The caller name is announced when 1 extension users listen to the messages from assigned numbers left in their mailbox 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the extension users Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the extension users by intercom Intercom Paging Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both the system and personal caller name announcement the VPS will use the personal caller name See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See Caller ID Screening in Table 36 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Recording System Caller
220. ice offers callers a menu of single digits that they may use to reach the desired location quickly and easily Sample Custom Service Message Thank you for calling ABC company If you know the extension number of the person you are calling you can dial it at any time For a list of extensions Press 1 to reach the sales section Press 2 to reach the service section Press 3 if you would like to place an order Press 4 all other callers please wait and an operator will be right with you Sample Custom Service Tree Create a tree to design a route leading callers to the desired extension mailbox or next menu This tree should include all available caller options and cannot be deeper than 8 layers Discuss available options with the customer before programming the system Custom Service 100 Main Greeting all ports day Custom 2 Custom 3 Transfer Transfer Extension List Extension List to Service to Orders New Cars Used Cars 82 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS The top of the tree should include what callers will hear when they are first connected to the VPS Then create a branch for each option This should be done until each caller option has been documented Next fill in each box with the action that it represents so you can easily remember what action corresponds to each keystroke Remember that it is possible
221. ies the maximum number of digits the caller can Callback No 20 enter as a callback number This number will be displayed on beepers pagers if the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled Callback No 1 10s Sets the maximum allowable time between each digit on Entry Interdigit 5 Beeper Callback No Entry If the caller does not enter Time Out any digits within the specified time the VPS will not accept entry of any additional digits System Up to 32 digits Specifies a telephone number displayed on the Callback No None Subscriber s beeper pager as a callback number when Type is set to Beeper Note If Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled through COS the callback number entered by the caller will be displayed on the destination beeper pager instead of the System Callback No However if the caller fails to enter a callback number the System Callback No will be displayed Other Parameters External Message Delivery Used to control the handling of External Message Delivery calls SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS To select the External Message Delivery follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 4 Table 59 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Retry Times 0 9 times Specifies the number of times that an external message 3 delivery call should be attempte
222. il Transfer Button Assignment This feature is used to transfer calls directly to a Voice Mailbox It can be used with APT DPT or Inband Integration 1 Enter Station Programming For KX TA series With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX TD series a With the phone on hook Press the Program button b Dial 99 Display changes to PI PGM Mode Press the desired Flexible CO or DSS BLF button that you want to assign as the VTR button Press 94 for KX TA series or 82 for KX TD series Screen output VTR Enter a Voice Mail extension number Screen output VTR __ _ __ _ The extension number you entered Press STORE Exit the program mode For KX TA series Set the MEMORY switch to SET on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series For KX TD series Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 7 Repeat these steps for each telephone INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 71 44 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 72 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 73 5 1 STARTING UP 5 1 STARTING UP 5 1 1 Before Programming 1 Determine the custom
223. ilbox Setting 2 Notification Setting Enter The Number 2 1 1st Device 2 2nd Device 3 3rd Device SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY Enter the data using the following table as a guide CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES Table 24 Description Value Range Description Function Default Dial Number Up to 32 Digits of Assigns the telephone or beeper pager number to 1 9 0 3 44 P M X Device 1 2 and or 3 None P Pause T Dial Tone Detection M Dial Mode Switching Code DTMF to Pulse or Pulse to DTMF X Callback Number Entry Code 1 9 0 X Dial Codes The callback number entry code X must be entered if COS is set to enable and set to beeper pager Use backspace to delete your entry Type of 1 Telephone Assigns whether device is beeper pager or Device 2 Beeper telephone Telephone Use Mode 1 Not Use Not Use Does not use device 2 Continuously 3 Scheduled Continuously The VPS notifies each time a message 1s recorded in the mailbox Scheduled The VPS notifies the subscriber if a Continuously message is left during one of the time frames No of Retries 0 9 Times Specifies the number of times a device should be 0 retried when busy or no answer Busy Delay 2 120 min The time the VPS will wait before retry on busy Time 3 No Answer 2 120 min The time the VPS will wait before retry on No Delay Time 30 Answer Time Frame 1 1 12 h Weekly Schedule for
224. ilbox numbers If both 3 and 4 digit extension numbers exist at one time the VPS will unify all mailbox numbers to 4 digit length by entering 0 at the end of all 3 digit numbers Example Extension Mailbox Numbers Numbers 201 201 0 202 202 0 203 203 0 2000 2000 2001 2001 2002 2002 The VPS puts 0 at the end of 3 digit numbers Note After mailboxes for subscribers have been created by Quick Setup the COS parameter Authorisation for Message Notification see Table 36 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS for COS number 1 will be set to Yes It will stay No for COS number 2 through number 62 To program mailbox parameters other than the extension numbers and Owner s Last Name or First Name see 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES The caller can use Dial by Name feature using the Owner s Last Name when in Automated Attendant Service or Voice Mail Service CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 79 5 1 STARTING UP 5 Port Service Setting Screen output Quick Setup Port Service Setting ports are currently set up to handle callers with standard Automated Atten dant operation day and night mode using the Custom Service feature Custom 1 You can change the operation to standard Voice Mail Custom 2 or leave it as Automated Attendant If necessary Custom 1 and Custom 2 can be modified under the menu Program gt Service Setting gt Custom Service Day Mode Night Mode PORT 1
225. inal emulation software enables the keyboard to be used as a data entry device While both the laptop and data terminal will work the laptop allows screens to be saved in a file throughout the process It is often helpful to retrieve these files later if technical support is needed 1 3 5 Specifications Table 2 Ports 2 Voice Storage 2h expandable Custom Services 100 Message Retention 1 to 30 days or unlimited Number of Mailboxes 30 subscriber mailboxes 2 manager mailboxes Number of Messages per Mailbox 100 maximum programmable 1 3 6 Hardware Flash Memory Card I Optional Flash Memory Position for KX TVP52 card 2 Telephone Inputs RJ11C e RS 232C Connector e 1 DIP Switch 4 bit 1 3 7 Flash Memory Expansion Capabilities Expansion of the flash memory capacity requires an optional expansion memory card KX 52 The 50 initially has 2 h memory The KX TVP52 increases the capacity by 2h 1 3 8 Recommendations for System Configuration General guideline a ratio of 6 1 for every 6 lines 1 port There are 2 questions to ask when considering how many ports are desirable VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 19 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS Are the ports answering all incoming calls or just forwarded transferred calls e are answering incoming calls how busy are the lines The guideline above 6 1 usually works well with moderate traffic This ma
226. ion Improper setting of the parameter Connect the cable firmly The terminal and VPS should have the same parameter settings for Baud Rate Word Bit Length Parity and Stop Bit Length See B7 1 RS 232C Parameters Unable to make reconnection when the line is busy Improper setting of the busy signal reconnection procedure Readjust the busy signal reconnection procedure to that of the connected PBX See Reconnect Sequence on Busy in Table 70 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 74 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Table 29 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Unable to make a no Improper setting of the no e Readjust the no response response reconnection response reconnection reconnection procedure to that procedure of the connected PBX See Reconnect Sequence on No Answer in Table 70 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Unable to generate a Call Improper setting of the e Adjust the Call Waiting Waiting tone from the VPS sequence sequence to that of the connected PBX See Call Waiting Sequence in Table 70 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Unable to make an Intercom Improper setting of the Adjust the Intercom Paging Paging for group 1 9 Intercom Paging access code access code to that of the connected PBX See Paging Code for Group 1 8 and Paging Code for All Groups in Table 62 in B6 7 Other Parameters
227. ipients if unable to deliver the message because of an incorrect password SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 221 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Other Parameters Call Hold To select Call Hold follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 5 Table 60 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Call Hold 1 Disable If set to Enable the VPS gives callers the option of Mode 2 Enable either holding for a specific extension or selecting one of Enable several Incomplete Call Handling service options While on hold the VPS periodically gives callers the choice to either continue to hold or select one of the Incomplete Call Handling service options If set to Disable the VPS immediately offers callers the Incomplete Call Handling service Call Queuing 1 Disable If set to Enable callers on hold are informed of their Announcement 2 Enable current position in the call hold queue Mode Enable Example One other person is waiting to connect Call Retrieval 1 30s Specifies the interval between the voice guidance Announcement 2 message that asks whether or not calls are to be retrieved Timing during call holding Example To cancel holding press 2 now Otherwise I ll try your party again Redialing 1 15s Specifies the interval between the voice guidance Cancel Timing 2 30s messages that ask if continuous redials are to be 3 45s atte
228. is mode is effective only for Incomplete Call Handling Service when the subscriber s line is busy or he cannot take the call or when he has enabled Call Blocking See Interview Service in this Table See 4 4 Message Reception Mode in the Subscriber s Guide Message Scan permits the subscriber to scan the first 4 s of each message The subscriber can replay the previous message play the next message or play the entire message See Message Scanning with Information in Table 36 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Scanning Messages in Glossary See 2 1 Receiving Messages in the Subscriber s Guide SYSTEM FEATURES 159 Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Message Transfer allows the subscriber to transfer messages to other mailboxes after playing The subscriber can also add a personal comment at the beginning of the transferred message if desired One or more individual mailboxes can be specified for message transfer Messages can also be transferred using either the System or Personal Group Distribution Lists See Transferring Messages in D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX See Message Transfer in Glossary See 2 3 Message Transfer in the Subscriber s Guide Message Waiting Notification Device automatically
229. ital Integration with the VPS Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level then complete the required programming before starting up the VPS of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming Refer to the KX TA series Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system programming mode Software Verification 1 Check the software version of the KX TA series using System Program 998 Example Y581FYYMMDD M The underlined digits represent the software production date code year month day For Digital Integration the software version of the PBX must be Y581F or higher If the software version of the PBX is lower than this consult your dealer From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 998 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE The system displays the ROM version and the date it was created This version must be Y581F or higher for Digital Integration to be utilised Set the date and time using System Program 000 Date and time are automatically synchronised between the VPS and the Panasonic KX TA series during initial setup Set PBX extension numbering using System Program 009 Assign the Voice Mail Port This program tells the PBX which jacks will be connected to the VPS This allows the PBX to send the proper Digital Integration information to those ports Jack 07 or jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS1 as the Voice Mail Port Jack 15 or jacks 15 a
230. itch to PROGRAM on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX TD series 66 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 44 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode 2 Press the desired Flexible CO or DSS BLF button you want to assign as the LCS button 3 Press 92 for KX TA series or 85 for KX TD series Screen output LCS 4 Press STORE 5 Exit the program mode For KX TA series Set the MEMORY switch to SET on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series For KX TD series Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 6 Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions This button must be assigned and lit for LCS to operate To light this press the button and Press the LCS password see 4 4 6 Live Call Screening Password Assignment 4 4 5 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment This button assignment allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Live Call Screening Cancel button 1 Enter Station Programming For KX TA series With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX TD series a With the phone on
231. ived message enabled 330 Messages 330 824 330 331 number messages to verify 331 332 minutes 332 309 332 763 332 72 264 332 72 332 333 MONDAY 333 334 more caller ID numbers 821 334 335 more members 821 335 336 MORE THAN ONE HUNDRED 336 337 more times 272 337 338 New message 338 339 New message retension time is day 339 70 340 new messages 824 340 341 Night mode first operator s extension 341 is extention number 342 Night mode first operator s extension 342 is not assigned MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 289 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 343 Night mode second operator s 343 extension is extention number 344 Night mode second operator s 344 extension is not assigned 345 Night mode third operator s extension 345 is extention number 346 Night mode third operator s extension 346 is not assigned 347 NINE 347 348 NINE HOUR 348 349 NINE MINUTE 349 350 NINETEEN 350 351 NINETEEN HOUR 351 352 NINETEEN MINUTE 352 353 NINETEENTH 353 354 NINETY 354 355 NINETY EIGHT 355 356 NINETY FIVE 356 357 NINETY FOUR 357 358 NINETY NINE 358 359 NINETY ONE 359 360 NINETY SEVEN 360 361 NINETY SIX 361 362 NINETY THREE
232. l Cl 6 6 6 Ringing SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 235 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table 72 Parameter Other KX T series turers 730 10816 Forward to VM N A N A 7 C2 C2 7 7 7 Busy Forward to N A N A 8 C3 C3 8 8 8 Other Extension Confirmation N A N A 9 D1 D1 9 9 9 Disconnect N A N A 9 DD DD 9 9 9 N A Not available Digit Translation Table Parameters The Digit Translation Table is used to translate the Follow On ID Signal from the PBX into the proper codes for the VPS This translation table is only effective for the incoming signal System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 3 To select the Digit Translation Table Parameters follow the menu path as shown Digit Translation Table Parameters Inter Digit Timeout System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 3 1 To select Inter Digit Timeout follow the menu path as shown Table 73 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Inter digit 1 4s This parameter defines the incoming signal interval Timeout 1 Follow on ID The Digit Translation Table is translated by a series of signals received within the specified time period 236 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Digit Translation Table Parameters Input
233. l Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service has the highest priority To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 Caller ID Call Routing Enter To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 1 Caller ID List No 1 120 Table 46 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Caller ID No P O or Assigns the telephone number which the VPS Up to 20 digits automatically forwards to a desired destination X consisting of 1 9 substitutes any number wild card 0 x To have a Private call automatically forwarded to a None desired destination enter P For an Out of Area call enter 204 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table 46 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Description Up to 20 characters None Enters a name and or description of the Caller ID number Any ASCII character except V can be used Note When nothing is registered in this parameter but the caller s name 15 transmitted from the Central Office the name will be automatically registered in this parameter When this is done an asterisk X will appear with the Call Transfer parameter if PUTD is enabled see
234. ler s number will be displayed instead of System Callback No MWL 1 Yes The message waiting lamp is illuminated when this Notificationfor 2 No parameter has been set to Yes and when unplayed Unreceived Yes messages remain after the Message Manager has accessed Message the mailbox SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 187 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table 37 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Device 1 Yes When this parameter has been set to Yes and when Notification for 2 No unplayed messages remain the system calls the appropriate Unreceived No device in numerical order until all unplayed messages are Message received 188 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE One of 4 incoming call services can be assigned to each VPS port and each PBX outside line trunk group Voice Mail Automated Attendant Interview or Custom Service The Port Assignment menu and Trunk Group Assignment menu allow the prompt mode and delayed answer time to be programmed Services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service has the highest priority To access the Port Trunk Service Menu follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3
235. llback Number Entry Code 1 9 0 X Dial Codes Note The callback number entry code X must be included in the number to be called if the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled through COS and Type of Device is set to Beeper The proper number of Pauses must be inserted before the callback entry code The Subscriber can also specify the dial number Type of Device 1 Telephone Specifies the device to be notified This is automatically 2 Beeper set to Beeper when X is used in the Dial Number Telephone above The Subscriber can also specify the type of device from his telephone Use Mode 1 Not Use Specifies how Device 1 2 or 3 is to be used The 2 Continuously Subscriber can also specify the use mode from his 3 Scheduled telephone Continuously 1 Not Use Device 1 2 or 3 is not used for a notification call 2 Continuously Device 1 2 or 3 is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox 3 Scheduled Device 1 2 or 3 is called on a schedule basis when a message has been left in the mailbox No of Retries 0 9 times Specifies the number of times that a notification call to 0 Device 1 2 or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no answer condition is received Busy Delay 2 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Time 3 a busy condition is received before making a notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 177 B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
236. ller ID Listing 7 Others 1 Extension Numbering Plan 1 16 2 Dialing Parameter 3 Message Waiting Notification 4 External Message Delivery 5 Call Hold 6 Rotary Telephone Service 7 Intercom Paging Parameters 8 Fax Management dan 9 Disconnect Parameter Hardware Z Setting 1 5 232 2 Port Setting for each port 3 PBX Interface 1 Dialing Parameter Parameter 2 Inband Signaling 3 Digit Translation 1 Inter digit Table Timeout 2 Input Output SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 173 B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Up to 30 Subscriber mailboxes can be created or edited by following the correct sequence of steps To access the proper menu for mailbox setup follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No Table 33 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Mailbox Number 2 5 digits None Specifies the Subscriber s mailbox number Mailbox number length is determined during setup or when initialising the system Mailbox numbers cannot begin with 0 If the length of the mailbox number has been defined as 3 digits for example the valid range for all mailbox numbers would be 100 through 997 998 and 999 would be reserved for the Message Manager and the System Manager The length of the mailbox number cannot be changed through the Mailbox Setting screen on
237. m Recording Length 0 3 2 Type the message length 7 2 15 Modified Prompt List MPLT This command is used to display the user prompt recording status recorded not recorded or turned off 1 Type MPLT then Press RETURN MPLT gt both prompts MPLT 1 gt User 1 prompts MPLT 2 gt User 2 prompts MPLT I T ist of Registered User Prompt 1 No 1 2 842 6 1 s 5 gt Total number of Registered 3 Total number of TURN OFF 2 gt gt gt Blank The prompt has not been recorded but the default System Prompt is active WILL BE HEARD Prompt no The prompt has been recorded WILL BE HEARD Prompt no with an The prompt has been recorded but is turned off WILL NOT BE HEARD OFF The prompt has never been recorded and the default prompt has been turned off WILL NOT BE HEARD SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 125 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Note The Total Number of Registered shown at the bottom of the screen does not include the prompts that have been turned off 7 2 16 Utility Command List HELP The HELP command displays the list of all available utility commands 1 Type HELP then Press RETURN HELP OFLN System Off line ONLN System On line PASS Password setting TIME Time amp Date setting PSET Report Print Out Time setting
238. m Service 3 User 2 System Menu Repeat 1 3 Times Specifies the number of times the Custom Service Cycle 3 menu is repeated before the No DTMF Input entry is used Call Transfer Extn Mbx No where a caller is transferred when dialling an Any Time Extn extension or mailbox number during the menu If this entry is set to Extn the caller is transferred to the corresponding extension If it is set to Mbx the caller is sent directly to the corresponding mailbox If it is set to No extension transfer and mailbox transfer are disabled only 1 digit entries work following the Custom Service menu Wait for 1 5s Used when the first digit of an extension is also a menu Second Digit 1 choice within the Custom Service If a second digit is not dialled within this time the menu choice is used No DTMF a f This is used when a caller does not dial anything when Input c hearing the menu usually rotary callers Operation Kevpad a n This entry specifies the action that is performed when a YP d 0 c keypad digit is dialled Callers can access these services Assignment others None by pressing the keys on their telephones 86 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Keypad Assignment Options Table 20 Entry a Transfer to Mailbox Function Sends the caller to the designated mailbox and plays the personal greeting b Transfer to Extension Transfe
239. m Service Report Ee RR ee aig late ent 131 TSA Call Account R epott 5 een eerte ep ee retentis 132 73 Port Usage eed obe hb 132 7 3 6 Port Usage Statistics Clear enne 133 7 3 7 Flash Memory Usage Report eese nennen nennen nre 133 7 3 8 Flash Memory Usage Statistics 1 134 7 3 9 Mailbox Usage Report ect etre Pp eed opi abge 135 7 3 10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear sissioni iiri tiia aittei nes 136 PILL Reporte fae eh eerte diete 136 1 3 12 Fax Call Statistics Clear eue ee e eet t ciate uie Due 137 T4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ares iati hae ep o Hop kn 138 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS 141 Appendix A SYSTEM FEATURES A1 SYSTEM FEATURES 144 Appendix SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION 170 B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES eese eese nete 174 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS rs EIE 180 B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK 189 Por Assisnment ie ce ete e e e e e eter te iere eee ee eese ea 189 4 2 Tr nk Gro p Assignment ete te ie ez hunt eiae 191 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS eere 194 B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters
240. mailbox 2 the VPS transfers calls to the users and 3 the VPS pages the users by Intercom Paging Caller ID Call Routing The VPS automatically sends calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension mailbox or Custom Service Personal Greeting for Caller ID Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting messages for special callers Caller ID Note 1 When an incoming outside call reaches the VPS via the PBX the VPS will wait about 2 rings before answering the call to receive the Caller ID information properly from the PBX Caller ID Note 2 In the documentation for the TD8 16 1232 612 series PBX the Caller ID feature is called CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation The KX TVP50 System comes from the factory already set up fora KX TD series PBX When the power is turned on for the first time the VPS will try to communicate with the KX TD series PBX through Digital Integration For this reason several things should be done before operating for the first time INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 53 42 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC series 4 0 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA series 4 21 KX TA series Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the Manager s Extension It is important that the KX TA series has the proper software level to allow Dig
241. mailboxes for each extension automatically Also sets the VPS clock with data from the PBX clock Live Call Screening Extension users can monitor messages as they are being left in the mailbox and intercept if required Two Way Recording Extension users can record conversations in their own mailboxes by pressing one button Two Way Transfer Extension users can record conversations in another person s mailboxes by pressing a button and dialling an extension number Direct Mailbox Access The subscriber is entered directly into his mailbox when he calls the VPS He does not have to dial his mailbox number Trunk Service Each PBX outside line trunk group can be assigned Universal Port one of 4 incoming call services Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service Intercom Paging Callers can page subscribers through built in speakers and external paging equipment For a Caller ID Caller if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced at the end of the page 52 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION Table 13 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES Caller Name Announcement A pre recorded announcement of the Caller ID callers System Personal name is heard when 1 extension users listen to messages left in their
242. mber To enter by name press 7 and 1 If you are using a rotary telephone stay on the line To call the operator press 0 2 Press X then enter the Message Manager s Mailbox Number 98 998 9998 or 99998 Enter your password followed by 3 Type the Password followed by The Main Menu of Message Manager s Service will be played You have number new message s To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages press 1 To set up message waiting notification press 2 To customise your mailbox press 3 To set the clock press 4 To modify message press 5 To end this call press 260 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX One of the Message Manager s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox This can be done at any time using the telephone Listening to Messages The status of the General Delivery Mailbox is monitored through the Message Manager s Mailbox Messages stored there can be listened to and if necessary transferred to their intended recipients 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 The VPS plays the number of new messages Press 1 to listen to the messages 3 The VPS plays each message with the sender identified along with when the message was recorded Press 0 to listen to the entire menu 1 Repeat thi
243. mbers beginning with 0 whether valid or not If the dialled number is included in the numbering plan the Automated Attendant will immediately send it to the PBX without waiting for further input If not included in the plan the Automated Attendant will wait until the dialled number is recognised as an extension number the internal inter digit timer expires or the caller dials 5 digits If the number for an outgoing call is not found on the Numbering Plan the VPS will consider it an outside number The VPS will then attempt to dial it using the Outgoing Call Setup Sequence SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 217 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Other Parameters Dialing Parameter To select Dialing Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 2 Table 57 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Number of 0 8 digits Specifies the number of digits necessary to access an Digits 1 outside line to Access Outside Line Example If the PBX requires callers to dial 0 to access an outside line this parameter should be set as 1 This enables the system to recognise that an outgoing call setup sequence is completed once the initial has been dialled 0 123 4567 The full sequence is therefore 0 outgoing call setup sequence 123 4567 The VPS can discriminate between local and long distance calls and c
244. me extension number If you try to enter a number that is already assigned you will hear an error tone Each digital extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail ports and must have 2 different extension numbers assigned Connect the jack assigned in Step 3 to the KX TVP50 Connect your laptop computer to the KX TVP50 and start your communication software i e HyperTerminal Procomm Plus Smartcom Communication Parameters 9600 8 Bit None 1 Disconnect the power from the KX TVP50 and set the DIP switch on the KX TVP50 to position 5 Only perform this step when initially setting up the system CAUTION Setting the DIP switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages except User 1 and User 2 prompts 9 Plug in and power up the KX TVP50 and wait approximately 3 5 min while the system initialises System Administration Start Up Sequence Before starting the VPS make sure all installation and line connections have been done as described in Section 2 The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing After turning the power on the system starts up in the following sequence The Power Indicator light goes on The Power Indicator light begins to flash 62 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 4 3 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX T
245. meter INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 49 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs CAUTION DO NOT create a mailbox in both VPS for the same extension Each extension can have a maximum of 1 mailbox in either VPS The extension should assign a Voice Mail extension from the VPS which contains its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice Mail Transfer DO NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS For example if Jack 06 extension 106 has its mailbox in the VPS1 assign extension 107 or 108 as the destination not extension 115 or 116 see the following diagram Extension 106 Port 1 Extension 107 Port 2 KX TA series Extension 108 Port 1 Extension 115 Port 2 Extension 116 3 3 3 KX TD816 KX TD1232 and KX TD612 Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension Select a maximum of 2 station ports to be connected to the VPS Plug each station into a Voice Mail port Go into System Program 602 and assign the Voice Mail stations to a different extension group By default all stations are in Extension Group 1 Go into System Program 106 and assign the new Extension Group to Auto Attendant AA Then go into System Program 813 and assign a floating number to the new Extension Group If your PBX is KX TD612 or your KX TD816 or KX TD1232 supports System Program 131 Hunting Group Assignment program as follows Go
246. meters cannot be assigned Note This parameter in COS No 1 is set to Yes when the Quick Setup procedure is used to create Subscriber mailboxes Beeper 1 Caller Select Permits Subscribers to use the Callback Number Entry Callback 2 Without feature No Entry 3 Before Mode After recording a message callers asked 5 Disable i Select if they would like to enter a callback Disable number Without Without recording a message the caller is asked to enter the callback number Before Before recording a message the system asks the caller to enter the callback number After After recording a message the system asks the caller to enter the callback number Disable Disables the Callback Number Entry feature Note To utilise this feature the callback number entry code must be included in the Subscriber s beeper pager number When Disable is selected or if the caller does not enter a callback number System Callback No See Table 58 will be displayed on the beeper s pager s display If a caller s number is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service the caller s number will be displayed instead of System Callback No MWL 1 Yes The message waiting lamp will be illuminated when this Notification for 2 No parameter has been set to Yes and when unplayed Unreceived Yes messages remain after the Subscriber has accessed the Message mailbox for Subscriber service 184
247. min 1 FROM 3 JAN 1999 9 53 AM New Cpy Del Exp MSGs 64 0 6 1 Drive Specifies the memory card 1 is the MASTER memory card factory provided 2 is the SLAVE memory card optional FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report Cpy Copy Transfer Del Deleted Exp Expired and Removed 7 3 8 Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear The Flash Memory Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the Flash Memory Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 2 System Reports System Report Clear Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear May I clear a flash memory usage report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Flash Memory Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 134 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS 7 3 9 Mailbox Usage Report The Mailbox Usage Report provides information about the usage at specific mailbox It includes the number of recorded messages the total amount of outgoing calling time and external message message notification and group message delivery System Administration Top Menu 2 1 7 To select the Mailbox Usage Report follow the menu path as shown Enter the Range 111 Note Specify the range or the mailbox number To obtain information
248. mpted during call holding 4 60s Example 30 To continue holding press 1 Otherwise press 2 Other Parameters Rotary Telephone Service For callers who are calling from rotary telephones unable to input DTMF signals or who are unable to properly respond to VPS guidance this parameter specifies how they are treated SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS To select Rotary Telephone Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 6 Table 61 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Rotary 1 G D M Defines how the VPS treats calls received from rotary Telephone Call 2 Operator telephones or calls from callers that are unfamiliar with Coverage Extension the VPS operation in the Voice Mail Service Day Night G D M Note G D M General Delivery Mailbox Other Parameters Intercom Paging Parameter Intercom Paging is a PBX feature that makes it possible to page the caller s party through telephone speakers To utilise this feature the PBX must have the Intercom Paging feature available and the VPS must be properly programmed This feature is available for APT DPT Integration mode only To select the Intercom Paging Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 223 B6 SYSTEM
249. n on the message waiting lamp on the extensions MRL Sets the minimum recording length of a message MPLT Displays the user prompt recording status HELP Displays brief instructions and a list of Utility Commands QSET Set up your VPS roughly so that you can use it quickly LMON Line Monitor PUTD Display DTMF Information 7 2 Off line Set OFLN The OFLN utility command is used to turn off the VPS Call Progression Mode Set the VPS to Off Line Mode before deleting a mailbox since this operation involves the updating of a large number of related parameters 114 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Type OFLN then Press RETURN If no VPS ports are in use the VPS will immediately suspend the call progressing service OFLN OFF LINE MODE If any VPS port is in use the VPS will display the following warning Now line is used WAIT The VPS will be in the Off Line Mode when the following message is displayed OFF LINE MODE 7 2 2 On line Set ONLN The ONLN command is used to place the VPS in the Call Progressing Mode Type ONLN then Press RETURN ONLN ON LINE MODE 7 2 3 Set Password PASS The PASS command is used to create change and clear system passwords Valid passwords are created using up to 8 characters any alphanumeric character space and can be used 1 Type PASS then Press RET
250. nce When enabled the PBX informs the VPS of the status of the call busy answered ringing etc by sending a code with DTMF tones before sending the normal call progress tones For example when a caller hangs up before making a selection the PBX sends 9 to the VPS port that answered This informs the VPS that the caller has hung up Upon receiving these digits the VPS goes on hook and is ready to handle another call Digital APT DPT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a Panasonic KX TA series PBX or to a Panasonic KX TD series PBX depending on the software version This digital integration provides the VPS with more information than DTMF Integration This information enables the system to identify the extension number of the caller know where the call is forwarded from and why and recognise what the caller wants to do Some features are available only with APT DPT Integration Live Call Screening Two Way Recording Two Way Transfer Direct Mailbox Access Intercom Paging Auto Configuration Caller Name Announcement system personal Caller ID Call Routing Personal Greeting for Caller ID 18 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS 1 3 4 Installer Equipment and Software Requirements The installer must have a laptop computer or data terminal equipped with terminal emulation software We suggest you use something like HyperTerminal by HILGRAEVE The computer is used to program the VPS Term
251. nce as it dials the beeper pager or extension number and waits to confirm notification The beeper pager or user assigned extension notification is meant to be used for necessity usually for mailbox owners who are often out of the office e g sales people or field representatives The only other option without message waiting notification is for mailbox owners to periodically call the VPS to check for messages TEST See if dialling the On code from an SLT can turn on an extension s message waiting indicator Screened Transfer from an SLT The PBX must provide a screened transfer from an SLT for the VPS to function properly A screened transfer 1 Puts the caller on hold usually with a hookswitch flash 2 Dials the extension 3 Checks to see if the called subscriber is in out or on another line and whether or not that subscriber accepts the transfer 4 Completes the transfer by going on hook or returns to the caller to say that the party is busy or not available It then gives the caller an opportunity to leave a message If the PBX does not provide screened transfer from an SLT the VPS cannot give callers the option to leave a message in a subscriber s mailbox TEST Place an outside call from an SLT See if you can set up a screened transfer to another extension Next try the same test with an internal call The VPS may have to transfer both types of calls Follow on ID or Called Party ID When
252. nctions Table 1 Position Additional Function 0 Normal setting All switches in 0 position Initialises RS 232C parameters 1 RS 232C default parameters 9 600 N 8 1 24 mH Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are set for Automated Attendant service 3 cms Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are set for Voice Mail service 4 Reserved m Initialises the VPS Clears all voice data except 5 m5 User 1 and User 2 prompts and returns all system parameters to the default setting 6 Reserved 1 2 rat 7 Adjust VPS parameters to your PBX quickly Initialises the VPS Clears all voice data and returns all system parameters to the default setting 8 mE 3 This makes more recording time available about 1 h if User Prompts have been recorded CAUTION User 1 and User 2 Prompts are erased 9 Reserved 4 p Auto Configuration is automatically executed and 10 all ports are set for Automated Attendant service due EN Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are set for Voice Mail service 16 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS Table 1 Position Additional Function 12 fai All service prompts are set to
253. nd 16 can be assigned for the VPS2 KX TVP50 2 ports assign max 2 jacks 54 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 42 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA series Extension group 7 KX TVP50 VPS1 KX TVP50 VPS2 Port 1 Port 2 KX TA series Port 1 Port 2 Extension group 8 From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 130 for VPS1 or 131 for VPS2 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output Disable C Press the SELECT button AUTO ANSWER Screen output Port 7 or Port 15 d To assign 2 jacks Press the SELECT button AUTO ANSWER again Screen output Port 7 amp 8 or Port 15 amp 16 To assign 1 jack skip this step e Press STORE f Press END HOLD Conditions lowest jack jack 07 or jack 15 entered here must be connected to the Port 1 of the VPS To change the current assignment from Port 7 to Port 7 amp 8 you must first change it to Disable Likewise if you want to change it from Port 7 amp 8 to Port 7 you must first change it to Disable If the current assignment is already Disable you can make a change in 1 step This condition also applies to System Program 131 When Port 7 amp 8 is selected in program 130 extension jack numbers 07 and 08 will be in extension group 7 automatically Likewise when Port 15 amp 16 is selec
254. new and saved Maximum messages Message Time SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 181 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table 36 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Message 1 LIFO Specifies the order in which messages are retrieved Retrieval Order 2 FIFO played back for listening LIFO 1 LIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent 2 FIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest message Message 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS adds the message sender s Scanning with 2 No information recording date and time to the message Information No during message scan Play System 1 Yes If set to Yes directions for recording a message are Prompt after 2 No given to the caller directly after the personal greeting has Personal No been played Greeting The following guidance messages are played 668 To end recording hang up or press I for more features 702 pause and restart recording press 2 Use Call 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS signals the busy extension that Waiting 2 No another call is waiting on Busy No Message 1 Yes The Live Call Screening feature permits the Subscriber Cancel for Live 2 No to monitor incoming messages as they are being Call Screening Yes recorded and speak to the caller if desired If the Subscriber chooses to speak to the caller if not disabled by the PB
255. ng the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension connected to the KX TVP50 Use System Programs 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter Table 14 2 Outside CO Lines 2 Ports Outside CO Ports Lines 1 1 2 2 1 2 c If the KX TVP50 is only answering calls not answered by user extensions Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programs 408 Day Mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing on every extension jack that you want to have ring Delayed Ringing Assignment To give users time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension connected to the KX TVP50 Use System Programs 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter 6 Connect the jack s assigned in Step 3 to the KX TVP50 7 Connect your laptop computer to the KX TVP50 and start your communication software i e HyperTerminal Procomm Plus Smartcom 8 Disconnect the power from the KX TVP50 and set the DIP switch on the KX TVP50 to position 5 Only
256. nt to edit this mailbox Notification Setting Device No Entry For Dial Number parameter Before the beeper pager number enter your PBX s line access code for dialling outward After the beeper pager number enter an X This X represents the callback number that the caller will enter and later will appear on your beeper pager Finally select Beeper in the Type of Device parameter 148 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Class of There are 62 COS levels for Subscribers e See 7 3 2 COS Class of Service COS COS 63 is for the Message Manager and COS Service Assignments 64 is for the System Manager SeeB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Creating and Editing a Mailbox 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Covering Extension forwards calls to a second extension when the first extension s subscriber is not available to take the call Also called when the caller presses 0 during a Personal Greeting See Covering Extension in Table 34 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Covering Extension in Glossary See 4 2 Covering Extension in the Subscriber s Guide Custom Service allows callers to access specific functions by entering numbers or symbols through the telephone keypad Up to 100 custom service menus can be recorded by the Message Manag
257. ntegration hardware settings The PBX is not programmed properly Do required integration to support DPT Integration programming as described in this chapter INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 63 4 3 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC 816 KX TD1232 KX TD612 10 Start up completed a The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start up has been successful The delay varies according to the system s condition b ON LINE MODE is displayed System prompt gt is displayed on the screen To enter system administration Press ENTER All parameters can be set through the menu driven program 11 If you have not done so already adjust the VPS parameters to your PBX Follow these steps a Disconnect the power to the VPS and set the DIP switch to position 7 Power up again b Select your country PBX see computer screen Disconnect the power to VPS and set the DIP switch to position 0 Power up again 12 Go to the System Administration Top Menu Type 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions TEST Press the INTERCOM button and then 265 or 165 If the VPS answers you have a DPT connection Set the DIP switch to position 0 after initialisation is complete The required programming is complete and the VPS and K
258. o 99 59 system must wait before forwarding messages that have 00 30 not been retrieved The maximum delay time is 99 h 59 min Note The delay time must be less than the New Message Retention Time or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded Forwarding 1 Copy Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the Mode 2 Move original mailbox When set to Copy a copy of the Move message is retained in the original mailbox after forwarding When set to Move messages are forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained at the original location SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 185 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS COS Nos 63 amp 64 for Managers To access Class of Service Numbers 63 amp 64 for Managers follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 63 64 Only the parameters listed below can be assigned for COS numbers 63 and 64 COS number 64 cannot assign the parameters relating to the Message Waiting Notification feature Table 37 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default New Message 1 30 days Defines the number of days that an unplayed message can Retention Time 30 remain in the mailbox The storage period begins the day after the massage is received Saved Message 1 30days Defines the number of days a played saved message can Retention Time 0 Unlimited
259. o Prompt No s No 678 To erase and try again press 3 732 603 678 614 677 732 601 678 677 732 603 678 679 To erase this message press 3 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 706 679 753 208 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 680 To erase this prompt and use system 714 680 757 prompt press 2 681 To erase this question press 1 681 748 749 689 682 To erase press 3 647 603 682 683 To fast forward press 6 717 725 734 683 670 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 684 To generate fax call report press 1 685 To clear fax call counts press 2 685 To generate memory usage report 684 press 1 To clear memory usage counts press 2 686 To generate mailbox usage report 686 press 1 To clear mailbox usage counts press 2 687 To generate port usage report press 1 687 To clear port usage counts press 2 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 307 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 688 To generate system service report 688 press 1 For memory usage report management press 2 For port usage report management press 3 For mailbox usage report management press 4 To generate mailbox param
260. o make this message private press 1 697 392 698 To message scan press 8 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 699 To modify message press 5 752 745 652 742 699 670 700 To notify the person by pager press 4 700 701 To page your party press 3 701 702 To pause and restart recording press 669 702 2 668 702 702 521 669 702 703 To play the entire message press 3 723 706 703 704 To play the message press 1 704 To check the previous message press 1 twice To check the next message press 2 705 To play the next caller ID number 659 705 press 2 706 To play the next message press 2 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 723 706 703 717 706 679 753 208 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 724 706 706 707 To play the next schedule press 2 728 707 719 709 707 719 709 708 To play the next press 2 659 708 709 To play the previous schedule press 4 728 707 719 709 707 719 709 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 710 To reach the covering extension press 710 2 711 To receive the message press
261. o not use this command for any other purpose Do not disconnect the RS 232C connection while the PUTD command is enabled This could cause data overflow 128 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS The System Administrator is able to generate 8 System Reports to monitor VPS operating status The reports can be displayed on a data terminal or printed The terminal or printer must be connected to the RS 232C port The following 8 report options are available To select the System Reports Menu follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 System Reports System Report Menu Mailbox Assignments COS Assignments System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Flash Memory Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report 8 Fax Call Report Enter the Number NADU RU LP HE The following 4 reports can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the following 4 reports follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 System Reports System Clear Menu 1 Port Usage Statistics Clear 2 Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear 3 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear 4 Fax Call Report Clear Enter the Number 7 3 1 Mailbox Assignments The Mailbox Assignments report provides information about the applied mailbox authorised features and current parameter settings
262. ode Features for PBX outside line trunk group 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 2 To select the Lunch Mode Features for PBX outside line trunk group 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 3 192 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Trunk 1 Break Mode To select the Break Mode Features for PBX outside line trunk group 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 4 Notes The trunk group assignment procedure for Trunks 2 24 is the same as Trunk 1 For KX TA series and KX TD series outside line trunk group number in this section assignment means outside CO line number SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 193 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS BS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters The Automated Attendant Service has 3 main functions Department or Speed Dialling Operator s Parameters and Alternate Extension To select the Automated Attendant Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 Department Dialing Department Dialling is a speed dialling feature that permits a caller to reach the intended extension by dialling a single digi
263. om the KX TA series or KX TD series telephone system This saves time in the initial setup Auto Forwarding Allows unretrieved messages to be copied or forwarded to another mailbox Automated Attendant An electronic operator capable of transferring a caller to an extension Call Blocking Connects the caller to the Incomplete Call Handling Service without ringing the subscriber s extension Call Screening Allows subscribers to screen calls the caller hears the message Record your name at the tone The VPS records the caller s name then puts the caller on hold to play the name for the subscriber who decides whether to take the call or not Call Transfer Transfers a call to the requested destination or to an alternative extension Called Party ID Sometimes referred to as Follow On ID Allows the VPS to dial extra digits to bring the caller directly to a specified mailbox rather than to the General Delivery Mailbox Glossary 321 Caller ID Call Routing Available with APT DPT Integration only The VPS automatically sends calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension mailbox System Group Distribution List included or Custom Service Caller Name Announcement System Personal Available with APT DPT Integration only The caller name is announced when 1 extension users listen to the messages from assigned numbers left in their mailbox 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to th
264. on is not assigned Linked Prompts List Subscriber Service Table 76 824 You have number 544 There were number of failure 338 new message 809 unsuccessful attempts to enter this mailbox MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 317 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Receive Message Table 77 317 Message recorded by mailbox number 325 Message transferred via mailbox number 13 and transferred via mailbox number 12 and mailbox number 12 and mailbox number 318 Message recorded on date 824 You have number 17 at time 330 Messages Message Scan Table 78 305 Message from name 816 was sent on date 17 at time Message Delivery Table 79 594 This message will be delivered on day 17 at time 318 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Personal Group Distribution List Table 80 821 You can add up to number 335 more members Check Mailbox Distribution Table 81 304 Message for name 323 Message sent on date 432 received on date 17 at time 17 at time 197 for mailbox number 323 Message sent on date 259 has not been received 17 at time 197 for mailbox number 258 has been erased because message retention time expired External Message Delivery Table 82 158 External delivery message scheduled for
265. on specific mailboxes from No 200 to No 209 Type 20 and Press RETURN or 200 209 and Press RETURN Mailbox Usage Report 4 JAN 1999 7 46 PM MBOX 111 JONE BLUE New MSGs 4 Received MSGs 6 ED MSGs 0 FROM 3 JAN 1999 9 53 AM Subscriber Access Time 00 00 40 MBOX Use Time 00 00 12 of 01 40 00 196 Used ED MN IM GM AF Feature Usage 11 31 20 14 22 Lcl Beep Extn Outcalling 6 13 0 28 Time 00 05 10 00 10 45 00 00 00 00 31 21 Rcv Del Exp MSG Received 42 30 11 FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report MN Message Notification GM Personal System Group Distribution List LD Long distance call 10 digits or more Lcl Local call less than 10 digits Del Deleted ED External Delivery IM Interview message AF Auto Forwarding Rcv Received Exp Expired SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 135 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS Note New MSGs Received MSGs ED MSGs are current status indications All else are accumulated indications since the last clearing of this report 7 3 10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear The Mailbox Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the Mailbox Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 3 System Reports System Report Clear Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear Enter the Range May I clear a mailbox usage report data Y N Type
266. on via the Manager s Extension 1 Enable System Program 102 for each extension connected to the VPS Jack 07 or jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS1 as the Voice Mail port Jack 15 or jacks 15 and 16 can be assigned for the VPS2 This parameter is used to tell the KX TA series which extensions are connected to the VPS Ports with this parameter enabled can receive Follow on ID and DTMF call status Signalling busy answered disconnect etc if the Voice Mail integration and DTMF Integration features are also enabled Enable System Program 103 to turn on DTMF Integration On extensions with the Voice Mail port parameter enabled the KX TA series can send codes DTMF tones to indicate call states this increases VPS efficiency Codes apply to all transferred calls outside calls only indicate disconnect provided the KX TA series is programmed for CPC Detection and the Central Office sends the CPC signal Refer to the Table 11 in Section 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Program 600 Reserve this extension group for these extensions Do not mix other extensions into this group NOTE Up to two KX TVP50 units can be connected to the KX TA series When two KX TVP50 units are connected to the KX TA series 2 different extension groups should be assigned for each KX TVP50 in System Program 600 One extension group is for jack 07 or jacks 07
267. one Identifies the extension number that will receive unanswered Subscriber calls The Automated Attendant Service accomplishes this call transfer The caller is given the option of transferring the call or leaving a message in the Subscriber s mailbox The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call Handling Service options that can be enabled or disabled by the Subscriber using the telephone keypad Note The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned as covering extensions Interview Mailbox Number 2 5 digits None Permits a mailbox owner to own an interview mailbox The interview mailbox number must be an unassigned mailbox number SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 175 B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Table 34 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default All Calls 1 Yes If this parameter is set to Yes all calls routed to the Transfer to 2 No extension are automatically forwarded to the extension s Mailbox No mailbox without ringing the telephone Forwarding is accomplished through the Automated Attendant service Callers are permitted to leave a message Note When this feature has been set to Yes the mailbox owner s extension does not necessarily need to exist as a phone extension of the PBX Notification Setting The parameters for the Message Waiting Notification Device feature is set using this procedure A ma
268. or other Caller ID List numbers by repeating Steps 4 7 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 273 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS D7 The table below shows the modifiable prompts Record prompts as User 1 or User 2 Some of the modifiable prompts are listed along with their linked prompt number In order to make LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS certain sentences in 1 voice record the related prompts together Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 1 20 members maximum 509 1 2 8 members maximum 509 2 3 After hours greeting is message 3 4 After hours greeting is not recorded 4 5 All pager entry modes are disabled 5 6 All calls transfer to mailbox disabled 6 7 All calls transfer to mailbox enabled 7 8 All mailboxes are assigned 8 9 All messages erased 9 10 All transfer services disabled 10 11 AM 11 12 and 12 317 13 12 325 12 13 and transferred via mailbox number 13 317 13 12 14 Answer length is number 14 454 15 Any digit on the telephone keypad 15 can be used 16 APRIL 16 274 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 17 17 594 17 304 432 17 323 17 197 259 323 17 197
269. otification Parameter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 3 Table 58 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Outgoing Call Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting Ports 1 2 Notification Device feature The VPS makes outgoing calls using the port specified in this field At least 1 port must be specified SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 2 9 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 58 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Message Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting Waiting Lamp 1 2 Notification Lamp feature Ports The VPS turns on the Message Waiting Lamp of the extension using the port specified in this field At least 1 port must be specified Message 1 No When set to Yes the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting Lamp 2 Yes Waiting Lamp of the extension each time a new message for Every Yes is recorded in the mailbox This will occur even if the Message Message Waiting Lamp was not turned off from a previous message This setting is useful when the first attempt is unsuccessful When set to No the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting Lamp for the first message only The VPS will not turn on the lamp for subsequent messages until the Subscriber has accessed the VPS to retrieve the messages stored there Max Digits for 1 48 digits Specif
270. ows the caller access to another Custom Service g Voice Mail Service Allows the caller access to the Voice Mail Service h Call Transfer Service Allows the caller access to the Automated Attendant Service Subscriber Service Allows the caller access to Subscriber Service Available only when calls are from subscribers j Department Dialling Transfers the caller to the Department Dialling menu k Dial by Name Lets the caller be transferred to an extension by dialling the first 3 or 4 letters of the extension owner s last name D Repeat Menu Repeats the Custom Service menu message m Main Menu Lets the caller return directly to the top Custom Service menu n FAX Transfer Enables the caller to send a fax message to the appropriate extension where a fax machine is connected SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 203 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS B5 3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to be automatically forwarded to a desired destination Calls from the assigned Caller ID numbers are automatically forwarded to a programmed extension mailbox System Group Distribution List included or Custom Service Private caller s number is not received and Out of Area calls can also be forwarded automatically to a desired extension mailbox or Custom Service Services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Cal
271. ox None numbers Any alphanumeric character and space can be used Member 2 5 digits Specifies mailbox numbers belonging to this group 1 20 None Mailbox Group Delete Permits specified mailboxes to be deleted from the list shown To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Delete follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 2 Group List No Mailbox Group Listing Displays all System Group Distribution List numbers shown To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Listing follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 System Group Assignment Extension Group Several extensions can be assembled into a single list The VPS is able to maintain up to 20 Extension Group Lists Each list can support up to 20 extensions Extensions can be added deleted and reviewed Members within a list are able to share the same mailbox and be notified by the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature if authorised when a message is present SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 207 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Extension Group Enter shown To access the proper menu for Extension Group Enter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 1 Group List No Table 48 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Group List 2
272. ox Subscribers can send messages to an individual or to several mailboxes at once The message sender can then verify that the other subscriber has received the message Receiving Messages Subscribers can choose from several different message notification methods They can be notified by message waiting lamp beeper pager or a call from the system to another line System programming determines whether a subscriber will be notified each time a message is left Subscribers can choose to be notified of messages differently depending on the time of day Mailbox parameters determine maximum length and accommodate 5 100 messages If the system is connected using Digital Integration subscribers can press a pre assigned button to record conversations in their own mailboxes or other subscribers mailboxes while talking on the phone Digital Integration also allows subscribers to screen messages as they are being left or pick up if they choose to take the call 12 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO 1 1 3 VPS Limitations The KX TVP50 does not support UCD functions UCD Uniform Call Distribution is a service that distributes calls evenly among extensions and returns to callers to say that all extensions are busy Calls can be forwarded by the KX TVP50 to the KX TD 1232 8 16 612 floating number of a UCD group The call then rings at the next available phone The KX TVP50 supports UCD functions
273. ox Setting Class of Service Setting Port Trunk Service Setting Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Service Setting Custom Service Setting Service Setting Caller ID Call Routing System Parameter Setting System Group Assignment System Parameter Setting Time Service Holiday Daylight Saving Time System Parameter Setting Prompt Setting 10 System Parameter Setting System Caller Name Announcement 11 System Parameter Setting Others 12 Hardware Setting 13 System Reset Clear Parameter CO PO Please select 1 7 2 10 Program Version Display VERS This command is used to display the version numbers of the flash memory and main ROM Type VERS then Press RETURN VERS V P S PROGRAM VERSION MAIN FLASH MEMORY VECIAA 3 00 MAIN ROM 1 02 Note The numbers are examples only Your system will show different numbers 7 23 41 Custom Service Report CREP The CREP command is used to display the Custom Service menu access count the keypad assignments message recording status and the tree structure of the Custom Service Type CREP Press Space Enter the Custom Service number 1 100 and Press RETURN 122 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Custom 100 System Access 9 Menu Msg None lt multilingual pick gt N Xfer Mbx 998 0 Operator 1 Custom 1 System Access 2 Menu Msg
274. perform this step when initially setting up the system 56 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 42 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA series CAUTION Setting the DIP switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages except User 1 and User 2 prompts 9 Plug in and power up the KX TVP50 and wait approximately 3 5 min while the system initialises System Administration Start Up Sequence Before starting the VPS make sure all installation and line connections have been done as described in Section 2 The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing After turning the power on the system starts up in the following sequence The Power Indicator light goes on The Power Indicator light begins to flash Checking Flash Memory Cards is displayed on the screen Screen output Checking Flash Memory Cards Please wait PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP 1 2 3 The VPS tests the CPU card the flash memory and the ports until 1 2 3 is displayed Active ports are displayed on the screen Screen output Active COs 12 DPT Interface Connection is not Established OFF LINE MODE This message is shown when the digital APT connection between the VPS and telephone system cannot be established This is no
275. press 3 To change the custom service menu press 4 To change the voice label press 5 To modify the user prompt press 6 To change the selection menu press 7 To change the system caller name announcement press 8 629 630 To change the first telephone number press 1 To change the second telephone number press 2 To change the third telephone number press 3 630 631 To change the message waiting lamp status press 1 To change the device status press 2 To assign the telephone or pager numbers press 3 631 632 To change the no answer greeting press 1 To change the busy signal greeting press 2 To change the after hours greeting press 3 632 633 To change the no answer greeting press 1 To change the busy signal greeting press 2 To change the after hours greeting press 3 To change the caller ID greetings press 4 633 634 To change the owner s name press 3 637 636 634 743 637 636 634 743 628 635 To change the password press 1 635 642 636 To change the password press 2 641 636 638 643 637 636 634 743 637 636 634 743 628 637 To change the personal greeting press 1 637 637 636 634 636 634 743 743 628 1 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 303 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
276. r s extension 69 is not assigned 70 days 70 339 70 449 70 71 DECEMBER 71 72 Delay time is time 72 264 332 72 264 72 332 73 deleted 289 73 74 Delivering message to name 74 75 Delivery list number is number 75 76 Department dialling menu erased 76 77 Department dialling menu is menu 77 78 Device notification for unreceived 78 message disabled MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 277 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 79 Device notification for unreceived 79 message enabled 80 Device number is number 80 81 DIAL TONE 81 82 digits 411 822 82 411 822 82 820 121 822 82 83 Direct mailbox access disabled 83 84 Direct mailbox access enabled 84 85 EIGHT 85 86 EIGHT HOUR 86 87 EIGHT MINUTE 87 88 EIGHTEEN 88 89 EIGHTEEN HOUR 89 90 EIGHTEEN MINUTE 90 91 EIGHTEENTH 91 92 92 93 93 94 EIGHTY EIGHT 94 95 EIGHTY FIVE 95 96 EIGHTY FOUR 96 97 EIGHTY NINE 97 98 EIGHTY ONE 98 99 EIGHTY SEVEN 99 100 EIGHTY SIX 100 101 EIGHTY THREE 101 102 EIGHTY TWO 102 103 ELEVEN 103 104 ELEVEN HOUR 104 105 ELEVEN MINUTE 105 106 ELEVENTH 106 278 MESSAGE MANAGE
277. ram below This connection creates 1 Voice Mail extension and can only answer 1 call This means that a fully configured 2 port system requires 2 jacks from the PBX KX TVP50 7 lt Port 1 KX TA series Extension 107 8 Port 2 T Extension 108 When APT Integration is activated a single extension jack provides 1 single line interface at a Port on the VPS For example when 1 line cord 4 wire is connected to Port 1 on the VPS 1 extension is provided 1 4 4 DPT Integration To the Panasonic KX TD digital PBX the VPS ports look like digital extensions The PBX thinks that the VPS is a digital phone and the VPS mimics all actions of a digital set Another advantage of digital integration is that the 2B D communication provides 2 VPS ports for each Digital Station port Communication between the VPS and the PBX through digital integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4 wire connections for each port TVP50 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 21 1 4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through DPT Integration the PBX and VPS must be programmed to work together 1 4 5 Connection Example DPT Integration For example you can connect jack 15 of the KX TD1232 to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4 wire connection see diagram below This connection creates 2 Voice Mail extensions and can simultaneously answer 2 call
278. rameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Caller ID Call Routing APT DPT Integration Only allows the System Administrator to assign up to 120 Caller ID numbers and program the route for the calls from these assigned numbers to the desired extension mailbox System Group Distribution List included or Custom Service See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See B5 3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters See Caller ID Call Routing in Glossary 146 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Table 31 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Caller ID Screening APT DPT Integration Only allows extension users to hear pre recorded caller names when calls from assigned numbers are transferred from the VPS to the extension users See Caller Name Announcement Personal and Caller Name Announcement System in this Table Caller Name Announcement Personal APT DPT Integration Only allows subscribers to assign up to 30 Caller ID numbers and record a caller name for each Caller ID number from their telephone The caller name is announced when 1 subscribers listen to the messages from assigned numbers left in their mailbox 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the subscribers Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the subscribers by intercom Intercom Paging Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Serv
279. re called subscribers Subscribers are assigned a personal mailbox that they are able to personalise Subscribers can record their name record personal greetings set covering extensions record questions for an interview mailbox set the message reception mode set incomplete call handling status set call transfer status enter Personal Group Distribution Lists set the message waiting lamp and set notification by calling 14 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS 13 SYSTEM BASICS 1 3 1 General The KX TVP50 is initially configured with 2 ports and 2 h of storage 1 3 2 System Components Main Cabinet ROS 8988 MODE DIP Switch Port 1 Port 2 AC Inlet Ferrite Core Earth Terminal Power Indicator EIA RS 232C Connector Note EIA port is at SELV Port 1 and Port 2 are at TNV Inside View of the Main Cabinet Memory Card e d u Position for Optional Expansion Memory Card VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 15 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS System Components AC Inlet Connects the power cable to an AC outlet dedicated for the VPS Power Indicator Indicates system status when flashing the system is off line not ready to receive calls MODE DIP Switch Check the status of this switch only at start up Provides the following additional fu
280. received 2 If set to Mbx the VPS will leave the number of unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox 3 If set to No the VPS will take no action concerning unanswered fax calls 226 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 63 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Fax Notification 1 No If set to Mbx the VPS will leave the number of Mode 2 Mbx successfully received fax calls in the Fax Manager s 3 Ext mailbox No Example You have I FAX message 1 If set to Ext after a fax extension successfully receives a fax call the VPS will automatically call the Fax Manager s extension and play a voice prompt You have I FAXmessage The VPS will also leave the total number of received fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox If set to No the VPS will not take any action concerning successfully received fax calls 2 Other Parameters Disconnect Parameter To select the Disconnect Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 9 Table 64 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Maximum 5 60 s The VPS will disconnect the call if silence is detected for Silence Time 10 more than the specified time SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 227 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
281. rent users their extension numbers their departments and the type of systems they use mailbox no mailbox beeper pager car phone 2 Assess your customers needs before setting up the system You will save yourself time later by giving customers what they need up front Ask the office manager how the VPS will be used Give examples Recommend that your customer use a word processor to log the greetings You will find these files much more easily than the worksheet pages if you need to make changes down the road 3 Standard initialisation For APT DPT Integration Connection a Program the ports of the PBX for voice processings See Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX Program the KX TA series the KX TD1232 the KX TD816 or the KX TD612 for Voice Mail integration KX TA series KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TD612 Program may be performed on site or at the office All memory is stored and will be retained when the unit is powered up as long as the DIP switch has been reset to position 0 prior to turning the unit off b Unplug the power cord of the VPS Plug station wire s from the PBX into VPS See 27 CONNECTIONS d Connect the computer to the VPS with a Null Modem Cable See 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable e Set the DIP switch to position 5 f Plug the power cord of the VPS g Wait until the warning appears on the screen h Set the DIP switc
282. ress the code for the mode you want this phone to have Hands Free 11 for KX TA series or X11 for KX TD series Private 12 for KX TA series or X12 for KX TD series Screen output Hands Free or Private 3 Press STORE 4 Exit the program mode For KX TA series Set the MEMORY switch to SET on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7300 series For KX TD series Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 5 Repeat these steps at each telephone Conditions None For the KX TD series only A single line telephone that is connected to the same extension as a proprietary telephone can also be used to monitor an incoming message Be sure that Live Call Screening on the connected proprietary telephone has been activated This feature is useful when you are using a cordless telephone The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being recorded To intercept the call flash the hook 4 4 4 Live Call Screening Button Assignment For the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension the extension must have an LCS button on it and the button must be lit at the time of the message This button must be either a DSS BLF or CO button must have a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign an LCS button on an extension This is a station level program and should be done at each individual phone 1 Enter Station Programming For KX TA series With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY sw
283. rmal This message appears because the PBX type for the VPS is not a KX TA series system Since the default PBX type is set to the KX TD816 1232 612 at the factory this message will always appear To change the default go to the System Administration Top Menu and Typel 6 3 1 Program Hardware Settings PBX Interface Parameters Dialing Parameters Menu Select 2 KXT Series and then 7 TA series at the 1 PBX and select 3 APT at the 2 Integration Mode Exit the menu by entering and the following display will be shown INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 57 42 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC series Screen output OFF LINE MODE If Interface Connection is not Established is still shown possible causes are Table 15 Cause Action The cabling between the PBX Confirm the cabling is extension ports and the VPS is not 4 connected as described in wire or is improperly connected Section 2 INSTALLATION The PBX is a KX TA series but does Consult your dealer or use not have the proper level of software Integration under required to support APT Integration hardware settings The PBX is not programmed properly Do required integration to support APT Integration programming as described in this chapter 10 Start up completed a The Power Indicator light stops blinking w
284. roup Assignment follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 System Group Assignment Mailbox Group This parameter allows a Subscriber to send a message simultaneously to several mailboxes These mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List The VPS is able to maintain up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists Each list can have up to 20 destination mailbox numbers Mailboxes can be added or deleted from these lists and reviewed as needed To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 Mailbox Group Enter shown To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Enter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 1 Group List No Table 47 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Group 2 5 digits Specifies any vacant mailbox number The Subscriber List No None can specify that the VPS transfer or deliver messages to all members of a group by simply specifying the System Group Distribution List No 206 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 47 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Group Name Up to 16 Allows a group name to be specified If a group name is characters not required press RETURN and specify the mailb
285. rs the caller to the specified extension c Operator Transfers the caller to the operator d Exit Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller e Previous Menu Returns the caller to the previous menu f Custom Service Sends the caller into the designated Custom Service and plays the menu g Voice Mail Service Activates Voice Mail Service h Call Transfer Service Activates Automated Attendant Service 1 Subscriber Service Allows the caller to enter subscriber service Digits received after entering this code are assumed to be the subscriber s mailbox number j Department Dialling Plays the Department Dialling Menu k Dial by Name Asks the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 characters of the person last name they wish to reach then allows transfer to that extension 1 Repeat Menu Repeats the menu prompt m Main Menu Returns the caller to the top level of Custom Service tree Plays the menu for that service n Fax Transfer Transfers the caller to the extension designated as the fax extension in system programming CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 87 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS 5 2 4 Recording Menus Once you have finished entering the parameters in each menu the menu messages should be recorded Menu messages tell the caller what options are available and what keys correspond to those options For this re
286. s This means that a fully configured 2 port system requires only 1 jack from the PBX KX TVP50 KX TD1232 15 Port 1 Extensions 265 and 266 When DPT Integration is activated a single extension jack provides 2 single line interfaces at a Port on the VPS For example when 1 line cord 4 wires is connected to Port 1 on the VPS 2 extensions are provided 22 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW Section 2 INSTALLATION INSTALLATION 23 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Please read the following precautions before installing the VPS 2 1 1 Installation The VPS needs to be installed on the wall Improper placement of the system may result in malfunction noise or discolouration Avoid installing the VPS in the following places in direct sunlight in hot cold or humid places in new areas where there are thermal springs etc where sulphuric gas may damage the equipment or contacts where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong in dusty places or places where water or oil may come in contact with the unit near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines elevators or electric welders on or near computers telexes or other office equipment near microwave ovens or air conditioners Ideally the VPS should not be in the room with these items and should be at least 1 8 m away from televisions Do not obstruct the area
287. s Message 1 1 Replay the Previous Message 2 Play the Next Message 3 Erase this Message 4 Reply 5 Rewind 6 Fast Forward 7 Transfer 6 Message Scan Transferring Messages Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox must be transferred to their intended recipients with any necessary attached voice comments We recommend that once a message has been transferred the original be deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 1 to transfer messages from the General Delivery Mailbox MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 261 D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX The VPS plays the first next last message Press 7 to transfer the message Type the destination mailbox number Press 2 to accept the number Press 2 to transfer with comment Note Messages can be transferred without comment by Pressing 1 A mailbox number can be added by Pressing 3 The Mailing List can be reviewed by Pressing 4 Record the comments and Press 1 Press 2 to accept the comments entered 262 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION The VPS is able to notify the Message Manager that unplayed messages are waiting in the Message Manager s Mailbox Two types of Message Waiting Notification are available Notification by Message Waiting Lamp and Notification by Calling
288. s any password of 3 digits 000 999 twice and For KX TD series Press any password of 3 digits 000 999 twice You will hear a confirmation tone then a dial tone Screen output The password you entered is displayed 4 Hang up or Press the SP PHONE button 4 4 7 Live Call Screening Password Cancellation To cancel the password follow the procedure below It is not necessary to enter Station Programming to activate this feature 1 Lift the handset or Press the SP PHONE button 2 Press the feature number 77 X for KX TA series or 799 for KX TD series 3 For KX TA series Press the password of 3 digits 000 999 once and For KX TD series Press the password of digits 000 999 once You will hear a confirmation tone then a dial tone Screen output Password Cancel 4 Hang up or Press the SP PHONE button 4 4 8 Live Call Screening Password Control This feature allows Operator s and the Manager of the PBX to cancel the password for LCS at any extension If a user forgets the pre programmed password Operator s and the Manager of the PBX can cancel the LCS password 68 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 44 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 1 Enter Station Programming For KX TA series With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM on the KX T7000 series or Press the PROGRAM button on the KX T7
289. s around the PBX and the VPS Both require space above for cooling and space on the sides for maintenance and inspection 2 1 2 Wiring e Donot wire the telephone cable parallel to an AC power source computer etc If cables are run near those wires shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and earth the shields Use protectors if running cables on the floor Avoid running wire under carpets Avoid sharing an AC power supply for computers telexes and other office equipment with the VPS Induction noise from such equipment may interrupt the VPS operation When making any connections or removing the cover be sure the power switch is turned off When installing telephone wiring basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines 24 INSTALLATION 2 2 UNPACKING 2 2 UNPACKING Unpack the box and check the items below Table 5 Main Unit 1 AC Cord 1 Screws Wall Mounting 3 Washers Wall Mounting 3 INSTALLATION 25 2 3 MOUNTING T
290. scription Function Default Reorder Indicates Reorder Tone Sent to the VPS when an 3 invalid extension number is dialled or when inadvertently connected to another VPS DND 4 Indicates Do Not Disturb Tone Sent to the VPS if the dialled extension has the Do Not Disturb feature enabled Answer 5 Sent to the VPS when the called extension answers the call Forward to VM Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a Ringing 6 voice mail port and that voice mail port is available to accept the call Forward to VM Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a Busy 7 voice mail port and that voice mail port is not available to accept the call Forward to Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to Other 8 another non voice mail extension Extension Confirmation 9 Sent to the VPS when it successfully dialled a Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off Code Disconnect 9 Sent to the VPS when the other party goes on hook Note Default values the above table vary depending on the settings of type and Inband Integration PBX Interface Parameters Table 72 Parameter Other KX T series rers T308 T1232 T96 T336 D819 TA T616 1232 612 series Ringback N A N A 1 1 1 1 1 1 Busy N A N A 2 Bl Bl 2 2 2 Reorder N A N A 3 B2 B2 3 3 3 DND N A N A 4 B3 B3 4 4 4 Answer N A N A 5 A2 A2 5 5 5 Forward to VM N A N A 6 C
291. set only Intercom Paging status to enable in Incomplete Call Handling Status SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 62 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Paging Code Up to 12 digits Specifies the intercom paging access code required by for Group 1 8 consisting of the PBX Paging Code 0 9 for each for All Groups group Note The Intercom Paging Group Number available Group 1 8 331 for each Subscriber is determined on a COS by COS 338 basis for KX TA series or 6301 6308 for KX TD816 1232 612 All Groups Group 9 33 for KX TA series or 63 X for KX TD816 1232 612 Other Parameters Fax Management The VPS can be programmed to automatically transfer incoming fax calls to a fax extension A maximum of 2 fax extensions can be specified as the destination for the Automatic Fax Transfer If the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax the VPS will transfer the fax transmission to the alternate fax extension To select Fax Management follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 8 Table 63 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Automatic 1 Disable Used to enable or disable the Automatic Transfer of Transfer of 2 Enable Incoming Fax Call Service Incoming Fax Disable P Note Automatic detection works for only the first
292. signing an extension as the fax manager to be notified on incoming faxes Disconnect Parameter 1 5 7 9 Determines how many seconds of silence the 50 allows during caller s message before disconnecting the call RS 232C Settings 1 6 1 Allows the system administrator to change the baud bit etc Port Setting 1 6 2 Use the CPC control of the telephone switch for normal disconnect problems Dialing Parameters 1 6 3 1 These parameters are set automatically when Quick Setup is conducted Most of the settings will be left alone The one setting that is changed quite often is the Transfer Sequence for the operator or the extension By default it is set at FX on APT DPT Integration and FTX for Inband Integration In other words the voice processor dials the flash waits for intercom tone and dials the extension number By default the KX TVP50 will stay on the line to monitor the status of the call If the extension user answers the voice processor will announce you have a call prior to releasing the call This can be alleviated by adding the letter A or D to the sequence A stands for answer the call will be transferred without the you have a call For a blind or unscreened transfer add the letter D for disconnect 84 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS 5 2 3 Custom Service Programming After the tree is complete enter the System Programming Custom Service Settings
293. sonic System 123545556758 KX TD816 1232 612 308 TA 1534 55 3638 series 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup The sequence must be followed through to the end to take effect If you press you will have to start over Quick setup may be performed again without erasing prior data for example when adding a slave system At the System Administration Top Menu Type 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER see 7 2 17 Quick Setup QSET Screen output System Administration Top Menu 5 3 gt QSET Quick Setup Utility for connection to Panasonic KX T series telephone systems This utility provides a quick way of programming the Voice Processing System to operate in a standard automated attendant or voice mail configuration when connected to a Panasonic KX T series telephone system The system will prompt you to enter modify or confirm settings based upon which PBX type you select By entering the appropriate information in the following screens the system sets PBX integration parameters identifies the extension numbers connected to it creates default mailboxes sets its ports to handle callers with automated attendant or voice mail service sets system passwords and sets the time and date Finally it confirms that you want to activate the system based on the information you entered modified or confirmed To proceed press ENTER To exit and cancel Quick Setup now press CUSTOMISI
294. splay Entry Code X are used to make these assignments When the Beeper Callback No Entry Code is added at the end of a beeper pager number the notification is made in a little different way The VPS will ask the caller to enter the number to be called and will display this number on the beeper pager The setting of the Callback Number Entry can be set to before the message after the message or with no message depending on System Programming Itis also possible to have the caller select whether or not enter a callback number The System Manager must authorise the use of the Beeper Callback No Entry Code 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 3 to assign Telephone Number 4 Press 1 to change the first telephone number 2 to change the second telephone number or 3 to change the third telephone number 5 Press 1 to set the telephone number 6 Type the telephone number 7 Press 2 to accept the entry 1 Change the telephone number 2 Accept 3 Review 4 Add more digits 5 Insert a pause 6 Set dial mode 7 Insert a wait for dial tone 8 Insert a beeper pager display command 8 Press 1 to be notified by telephone or 2 by a beeper pager 264 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX The Message Manager is able to customise the Message Manag
295. stems are Compatible See Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS See Inband Signalling in Glossary Incomplete Call Handling Service allows the subscriber to offer callers several service options when the extension is busy or there is no answer Leaving a Message Transfer to Covering Extension Returning to the Automated Attendant Top Menu Intercom Paging Calling a Beeper Pager or Calling Operators See Calling a Beeper Pager in this Table See Intercom Paging APT DPT Integration Only in this Table See Incomplete Call Handling Service in Glossary See 4 3 Incomplete Call Handling Status in the Subscriber s Guide 154 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES Integration Only paging and these can be specified by VPS programming when the subscribers have set Intercom Paging for Call Transfer or when the subscribers have set Intercom Paging for Incomplete Call Handling The caller is briefly placed on hold while the VPS announces the page and until the subscriber answers the page The subscriber can answer the page from any extension using the paging answer code this code is specified in the PBX User Manual For a Caller ID Caller if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced at the end of the page If the caller s name has been recorded for both the System and Personal Call
296. t iege em e ere ee Pee edere 14 1 2 3 Subscriber Use are rot tre das rate Hp o Dope e sales 14 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS tvi 15 U3 el General cn iet ett wn etat dh 15 1 3 2 System Components vc csc iter rere ie ter e t die eee dec uta 15 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are 17 1 3 4 Installer Equipment and Software Requirement 19 1 3 5 Specifications titm ire edite aa Goh Decent 19 1 3 0 Hardware gh c cen ettet dre e iet e reiecit re d 19 1 3 7 Flash Memory Expansion Capabilities eese enne 19 1 3 8 Recommendations for System Configuration seen 19 1 4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION eere eren 21 General ode eh ee ees eene etudes 21 1 42 APT Integration eec ete eee d 21 1 4 3 Connection Example APT Integration esses ene 21 1 44 DPTTIntegration eei ee Rope peer tedo red teet 21 1 4 5 Connection Example DPT Integration esses eene 22 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 24 Installation iere eee rte tee erc nie etie 24 2 12 pei ee ee NU RU ote rede a 24 jn nnr P 25 2 5 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A 26 24 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION esee eese en nonse
297. t 1 9 To select Department Dialing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 1 Table 40 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Department 2 5 digits Specifies the department extension number Dialing No 1 9 None Note 1 The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned Note 2 The Message Manager must record the Department Dialling menu Operator s Parameters Used to specify the operator s operator 1 2 3 extensions and mailboxes and how operator seeking calls are treated Operator s parameters can be individually set for Day Night Lunch and Break Modes 194 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS To select Operator s Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 1 This parameter is used to enable or disable the Operator Service It specifies Operator 1 s extension and the treatment of the calls transferred to that extension The assigned extension number for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager When Operator service is enabled operator seeking calls are first transferred to Operator 1 s extension shown To select Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 1 follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 1
298. t yet been recorded go to Step 6g Note Press 2 to return to Step 6b Press 3 to turn off the prompt e The VPS plays the current recording Press 1 to change the prompt Note Press 2 to retain the current recording Return to Step 6b f Press 1 to record a new prompt Note Press 2 to erase the current recording Return to Step 6b Press 3 to turn off the specified prompt Return to Step 6b g Record a prompt at the tone and Press 1 to end recording h Press 2 to accept the recorded prompt Note Press 1 to review the recorded prompt Press 3 to erase the recorded prompt and try again Return to Step 6f Press 4 to add a message Press X to erase the recorded prompt and exit Return to Step 6b i Record other prompts by repeating Steps 6b through 6h 7 To change all prompts in a row a Press 2 b Enter the prompt number from which you want to change There is a complete list of modifiable prompts at the end of this section The VPS plays the prompt number d Press 1 to change the prompt Note Press 2 to go to Step 7g Press 3 to turn off the prompt e Record a prompt at the tone and Press 1 to end recording f Press 2 to accept the recorded prompt Note Press 1 to review the recorded prompt MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 271 D6 RECORDING MESSAGES Press 3 to erase the recorded prompt and try again Return to Step 7e Press 4 to add
299. tal Integration via the Manager s EXternslOB 2 de eerie ete tert dde P eee beret tente 60 4 4 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 65 4 4 1 Live Call Screening LCS Programming eene 65 4 4 2 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment 65 4 4 3 Live Call Screening Private Hands Free Mode Assignment eese 65 4 4 4 Live Call Screening Button Assignment eese rennen eene 66 4 4 5 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment 67 4 4 6 Live Call Screening Password Assignment eese een 68 4 4 7 Live Call Screening Password Cancellation eere 68 4 4 8 Live Call Screening Password Control esee 68 4 4 9 Two Way Recording into One s Own Mailbox eene 69 4 4 10 Two Way Recording Button Assignment esee 69 4 4 11 Two Way Transfer into Mailbox eese nennen 70 4 4 12 Two Way Transfer Button Assignment seen 70 4 4 13 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment eeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeren nee 71 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM SL STARTING UP as vae eoa 74 331 1 Before Programming ie tet nt ectetuer ide o eue 74 5 12 Quick Setups iacere db De bte re eer b tue 74 3 1 3 Startins the Quick Setup notet dee oet te et eet entes 75 Table of Contents 5 2 PORT SETTING
300. ted in program 131 extension jack numbers 15 and 16 will be in extension group 8 automatically Also the Station Hunting type is set as Circular automatically in each of these 2 extension groups 5 Select the appropriate outside CO line feature settings depending on how your customer plans to use the VPS A to answer all incoming calls B as an operator backup or C to only answer calls not answered by user extensions Recommended outside CO line feature settings INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX TD DIGITAL PBX 55 42 CONNECTING THE KX TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC series If the KX TVP50 is answering all incoming calls Outside CO Line Mode Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group The KX TA series will allow incoming outside calls to hunt only if the outside CO lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group Lines programmed as Normal do not hunt b If the KX TVP50 is only answering calls not answered by the operator Operator Backup Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programs 408 Day mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing at the operator s extension jack Delayed Ringing Assignment To give the operator time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setti
301. tensions and non VPS extensions Type S to go to the next screen 3 Extension Numbers for Mailboxes Screen output Quick Setup Enter Extensions for Mailboxes What extensions need a mailbox on this system 1 210 2 211 3 212 4 213 5 214 6 215 7 216 8 217 9 218 10 219 11 220 12 221 13 222 14 223 15 224 16 225 17 226 18 227 19 228 20 229 21 230 22 231 23 232 24 233 25 234 26 235 27 236 28 237 29 238 30 239 Please enter extension numbers P Previous menu N Next menu S Next Screen Enter extension numbers of subscribers who need personal mailboxes 2 5 digits For example to enter the extension number 201 Press 201 and Press ENTER You can also enter multiple extensions Enter the extensions from No 201 to No 210 by Pressing 201 210 and Pressing ENTER The VPS will create mailboxes with the extension numbers entered See Step 4 Note The VPS accepts any extension numbers within a 2 to 5 digit range Up to 30 extension numbers can be entered CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 77 5 1 STARTING UP 4 Creating Mailboxes To go to the next screen S or to change the menu P or N the cursor must be in the MBX column Screen output Quick Setup Mailbox Editing Extension and mailbox list Assigned 30 Vacant 0 Page 1 4 Ext MBX Owner Last Name MAKE Make Delete eso 201 210 210 211 211
302. ternal message delivery enabled 163 164 FAX messages 824 164 165 FEBRUARY 165 166 FIFTEEN 166 167 FIFTEEN HOUR 167 168 FIFTEEN MINUTE 168 169 FIFTEENTH 169 170 FIFTH 170 171 FIFTY 171 172 FIFTY MINUTE 172 173 FIFTY EIGHT 173 174 FIFTY EIGHT MINUTE 174 175 FIFTY FIVE 175 176 FIFTY FIVE MINUTE 176 177 FIFTY FOUR 177 178 FIFTY FOUR MINUTE 178 179 FIFTY NINE 179 180 FIFTY NINE MINUTE 180 181 FIFTY ONE 181 182 FIFTY ONE MINUTE 182 183 FIFTY SEVEN 183 184 FIFTY SEVEN MINUTE 184 185 FIFTY SIX 185 186 FIFTY SIX MINUTE 186 187 FIFTY THREE 187 188 FIFTY THREE MINUTE 188 189 FIFTY TWO 189 190 FIFTY TWO MINUTE 190 191 FIRST 191 282 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 192 First telephone number is telephone 192 number 193 First telephone number is not 193 assigned 194 FIVE 194 195 FIVE HOUR 195 196 FIVE MINUTE 196 197 for 197 323 17 197 259 323 17 197 258 318 17 197 259 198 For Q press 7 132 198 199 199 For Z press 9 132 198 199 200 For a system report press 5 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 201 For automated attendant status press 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 4 711 663 648 201
303. the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced at the end of the page Interview Service A special type of subscriber mailbox enabling the subscriber to record up to 10 questions After the answers are recorded the Message Waiting Lamp is turned on at the subscriber telephone Good for claims departments order desks job applications etc Keypad All touch tone keys on the telephone 324 Glossary LCD Liquid crystal display Live Call Screening Available with APT DPT Integration only The proprietary telephone works like an answering machine The subscriber can hear the caller through the speakerphone while the message is being recorded LOAD One of the utility commands It is used to load new or saved data to the VPS from a personal computer Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox An extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox This feature is used by subscribers who are often unavailable or who do not have a telephone Mailbox Capacity messages The number of messages that can be recorded in a subscriber s mailbox should be set between 5 and 100 messages by the System Administrator or the System Manager Mailbox Capacity recording time The total amount of time for messages in a subscriber s mailbox should be set between 5 and 100 min by the System Administrator or the System Manager Mailbox Extension Normally the same number as the telephone extension number
304. the Day Night Lunch or Break Mode See Time Service 1 5 2 in 5 2 2 Custom Service Features See B6 2 Time Service Two Way Recording APT DPT Integration only permits a subscriber to record two way conversations into his her mailbox See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See4 4 9 Two Way Recording into One s Own Mailbox See 4 4 10 Two Way Recording Button Assignment See Two Way Recording in Glossary See 4 14 Recording a Two Way Conversation in the Subscriber s Guide Two Way Transfer APT DPT Integration only permits a subscriber to record two way conversations into another person s mailbox See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See 4 4 11 Two Way Transfer into Mailbox See 4 4 12 Two Way Transfer Button Assignment See Two Way Transfer in Glossary See 4 14 Recording a Two Way Conversation in the Subscriber s Guide Trunk Service Universal Port APT DPT Integration only allows call services to be assigned to each outside line trunk group The incoming call service determines which service is used when answering incoming calls These services include Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Utility Commands allow the system administrator to access critical system functions See 7 2 UTILITY
305. tion press 2 To play the message press 3 723 To replay the previous message press 723 706 703 1 724 To replay the previous message press 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 1 twice 753 698 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 724 706 724 725 To reply press 2 717 725 670 717 725 734 683 670 726 To reply press 4 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 727 To report all mailbox usage press 2 751 727 728 To reschedule press 1 728 707 719 709 729 To retrieve the call press 2 729 730 To review the mailing list press 4 755 610 730 755 754 610 730 731 To review this group press 4 626 606 656 731 732 To review press 1 732 603 678 614 677 732 601 678 677 732 603 678 733 To review press 3 611 657 733 639 603 733 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 612 660 733 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 311 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 734 To rewind press 5 717 725 734 683 670 717 724 706 679 726 734 683
306. tomated Attendant Service This setting is recommended for better integration with the PBX To access the proper menu for Extension Numbering Plan follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 1 216 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table 56 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Numbering 2 5 digits Specifies the first 1 or 2 digits of the PBX extension Plan consisting numbers Up to 16 entries can be added to the list Each 1 16 of 0 9 X entry can contain 2 5 digits of numeric characters 0 9 Numbering Plan and X which matches any digit Extension numbers 1 2 XX cannot begin with 0 Numbering Plan 2 3 XX Examples Numbering Plan 3 16 None a If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 201 through 264 and 301 through 364 specify the numbers as follows 2XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 2 3XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 3 b If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 400 through 450 and 3300 through 3399 specify the numbers as follows 4XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 4 33XX Indicates any 4 digit extension starting with 33 Note Auto Configuration will set this parameter automatically The Automated Attendant will dial any 2 5 digit PBX extension number except nu
307. tructions to callers These are either system prompts or user prompts VPS Voice Processing System e g Panasonic KX TVP50 Glossary 329 330 Glossary Index Index 331 Index A Alternate extension group 144 APT integration 144 Auto configuration 144 Auto forwarding 145 Automated attendant 145 B Broadcasting messages 145 Busy coverage mode 145 C Callservices 146 Call transfer status 146 Callback number entry 146 Caller ID call routing 146 Caller ID screening 147 Caller name announcement personal 147 Caller name announcement system 147 Class of service COS 149 Connections optional expansion memory card KX TVP52 31 Connections PBX 33 Covering extension 149 Custom service 149 D Data loading new or saved data to the VPS LOAD 121 Data saving the system data to the backup device SAVE 108 119 Daylight saving time assignment 149 Department dialling 150 Dialling by 150 Digital integration 18 21 51 DIP switch 15 16 29 56 59 62 64 Direct mailbox access 150 DPT integration 151 E Expansion capabilities 19 Extension group 151 Extension numbering plan 151 External message delivery list 151 External message delivery service 152 External message delivery status 152 F Fax management 153 G Group distribution list personal 153 Group distributionlist system 153 H Hardware settings 43 228 Hold 153 Holiday service 153
308. uld like to hold press 1 276 392 277 Incorrect entry 277 278 Intercom paging disabled 278 279 Intercom paging enabled 279 280 Intercom paging group number is 280 number 281 Interview mailbox number is 281 mailbox number 282 Interview mailbox number is deleted 282 283 Interview mailbox number is not 283 assigned 284 JANUARY 284 285 JULY 285 286 JUNE 286 287 Leaving a message is disabled 287 288 Leaving a message is enabled 288 289 Mailbox 289 289 73 290 Mailbox is in use 290 291 Mailbox list label erased 291 292 Mailbox list number number 292 293 Mailbox number already specified 293 294 MARCH 294 295 Maximum number of caller IDs for 295 caller name announce is number 296 Maximum number of messages 296 mailbox is number 297 MAY 297 298 Message back up disabled 298 299 Message back up enabled 299 300 Message cancel for live call screening 300 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 287 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 301 Message cancel for live call screening 301 enabled 302 Message delivery cancelled 302 303 Message erased 303 304 Message for name 304 432 17 305 Message from name 305 816 17 306 Message from the interview mailbox 306 307 Message from the message mana
309. unction Default Incoming Call 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Service 2 Auto Attn Md Note 1 When you specify the Interview Service one of esto Subscriber s Interview mailbox numbers should also be 5 None es specified None Note 2 When you specify the Custom service one of 100 1 100 Custom service numbers should also be specified SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 191 B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE Table 39 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Incoming Call 1 System Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on Service Prompt 2 User 1 this outside line trunk group 3 User 2 Note 1 This parameter is not valid if incoming call User 1 gt service is set to Interview or Custom Note 2 If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below Prompt for 1 System Specifies in which language rotary callers hear the voice Rotary Callers 2 User 1 prompts when they cannot enter any digit to select a 3 User 2 Prompt Selection Number while Multilingual selection System menu message is being played Delayed 0 15 s Specifies whether the outside line trunk group answers Answer 0 immediately 0 or with delay 1 15 s Time Trunk 1 Night Mode Trunk 1 Lunch Mode To select the Night M
310. unction is not available 508 415 508 509 Sorry this group is full 509 2 509 1 510 Sorry this line is busy 510 511 Sorry this list is in use for delivery If 511 this list is edited all the deliveries will then be cancelled 512 Sorry this mailbox is in use 512 513 Sorry this name cannot be found 513 514 Sorry this number is not assigned 514 515 Sorry this pager is not available 515 516 Sorry this report is not available 516 517 Sorry you cannot deliver the message 517 The maximum number of delivery has already been reached 518 Sorry you cannot reply 518 538 518 593 518 589 519 Sorry you cannot transfer a private 519 message 520 STAR X 520 521 State your comment at the tone 521 669 702 522 SUNDAY 522 523 Telephone number deleted 523 524 Telephone number is telephone 524 number 525 Telephone number is not assigned 525 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 297 D7 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table 75 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 526 TEN 526 527 TEN HOUR 527 528 TEN MINUTE 528 529 TENTH 529 530 Thank you 530 531 Thank you for calling 531 532 The callback number is telephone 532 647 392 number 533 The callback number is not assigned 533 647 392 534 The FAX transfer situation is as 534
311. urrent time Current date is TUE 3 AUG 1999 Enter new date DD MM YY 3 Type the current date For the year type the last 2 digits Note Enter the exact time and date This command cannot be used when either the System or the Message Manager is accessing the time setting feature 7 2 5 Print Reports at Specified Time PSET This command is used to issue system usage reports Flash Memory Usage Report Port Usage Report Call Account Report at a specified time each day by entering the PSET command A 116 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS printer or data terminal must be connected to the VPS at the RS 232C port for the reports to be printed or displayed 1 Type PSET then Press RETURN PSET Report Print Out Service Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable 2 Type 1 to enable this function or Type 2 to disable it Enter The Print Out Time HH MM AM PM 3 Type the time to print the reports Note The reports will be displayed only if the system is in the mode where the gt prompt is displayed 7 2 6 Error Log Display ELOG This command is used when diagnosing VPS problems When selected this command will display an error log COM Communication error between CPU and DSP DATA Process error of voice data MEM Memory error PRG Program error in CPU card R W Read Write error of Flash Memory Type ELOG then Press RETURN
312. vice Parameter Report 8 Fax Call Report Note The Mailbox Parameter Report is displayed as Mailbox Assignments The Class of Service Parameter Report is displayed as COS Assignments 4 For Flash Memory Usage Report Port Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report or Fax Call Report Press 1 To generate the Mailbox Usage Report go to Step 5 5 Mailbox Usage Report Type the mailbox number of the start of the range Note If a is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers e g for 3 digit mailbox numbers reports for all mailboxes will be printed and the System Report Menu will appear In this case Step 6 can be skipped 6 Press 1 to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the range or Press 2 to obtain all mailbox usage counts This mailbox number is the end of the mailbox range The mailbox number entered in Step 5 is the start of the range For example 252 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C5 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS to specify the mailbox range 201 through 309 enter 201 in Step 5 and 309 in Step 6 Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer a System Report will not be generated The System Report starts to be generated after the System Administrator has completed programming and system prompt gt is displayed on the computer Clearing the Reports The Port Usage Flash Memory Usage Mailbox Usage and Fax Call Reports can be cleared
313. w mailbox the following parameters can be set Mailbox Number e Subscriber s Voiced Name The VPS allows a maximum of 4 s to record the name The name must be spoken slowly and clearly Use the Subscriber s last name Extension Number Initial 3 or 4 Letters of the Subscriber s Last Name Only the first 3 or 4 letters of the owner s last name are entered Class of Service Number Any COS number 1 62 may be entered Interview Mailbox Number Interview Mailbox Numbers must be different from Subscriber Mailbox Numbers All Calls Transfer Mailbox The steps listed below must be followed when creating changing or deleting any mailbox parameter 1 Log in to the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for Mailbox Setup 4 Press 1 to Assign or Edit 5 Type the mailbox number SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 241 C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES 6 Press 2 to accept the entry 7 As each parameter is played a Press 1 to enter the new parameter or 2 to leave the parameter unchanged b Enter the parameter and Press 1 c Confirm the new parameter is correct and Press 2 to accept it 8 The All Calls Transfer to Mailbox parameter is the last parameter to be entered When this entry is completed the prompt at Step 4 will appear Continue assigning or editing other mailboxes by repeating Steps 5 7 9 To return to the Main Menu Press X twice Deleting a Mailbox When mailboxes are no
314. ximum of 3 destinations Device 1 2 3 can be specified per mailbox Class of Service programming determines if the Subscriber is able to use this feature If the destination device is a telephone the subscriber will be called when he has message s and will have a chance to listen to the message s Ifthe destination device is a beeper pager the subscriber will be notified when he has message s If the beeper pager has a display it is possible to send to it a callback number The callback number can be recorded when a caller leaves a message If he does not leave a callback number the System Callback No or the caller s number if it is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service will be sent instead as shown or 3 To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No 2 Device No 1 2 176 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Notification Setting Device 1 3 Table 35 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Dial Number Up to 32 digits Assigns a telephone or beeper pager number to consisting of 1 9 Device 1 2 or 3 The subscriber can also specify the 0 dial number from his telephone P T M X P Pause None T Dial Tone Detection M Dial Mode Switching Code DTMF to Pulse or Pulse to DTMF X Ca
315. xtension He does not have to enter any special codes But his password if established must be entered DPT Integration Digital integration between the KX TD series telephone system and the VPS Requires upgraded software in the telephone switch DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Commonly referred to as touch tone External Call Forwarding Available on the KX TA series and KX TD series telephone system Forwards calls to an extension that has call forwarding activated to an outside phone External Delivery Message A message intended for automatic delivery to external parties and or extensions External Message Delivery List Allows the subscriber to create 2 lists to deliver messages to external parties Each list can have 8 destinations External Message Delivery Redial Allows the subscriber when making an external delivery to instruct the VPS to make an assigned number of attempts when the line is busy or when there is no answer Fast Forward Puts the user 4 s ahead in the current message Follow On ID See Called Party ID General Delivery Mailbox When the caller does not dial anything either because he does not want to or he is using a rotary telephone he can be sent to the General Delivery Mailbox Periodically daily is best the Message Manager should transfer the contents of the General Delivery Mailbox to the appropriate destinations Hash Sign Same as Pound Sign Glossary 323 One
316. y have to be modified for heavy traffic These recommendations are outlined in the following chart Table 3 Outside CO lines Port 1 6 1 7 12 2 One port may not support an Automated Attendant configuration with 5 outside CO lines The following recommendations for Automated Attendant ports may have to be modified for heavy traffic Table 4 Outside CO lines Port 1 4 1 5 8 2 20 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 14 DIGITAL INTEGRATION 14 DIGITAL INTEGRATION 1 4 4 General There are 2 types of Digital Integration APT Integration and DPT Integration APT Integration is available when the KX TVP50 is connected to a KX TA analogue PBX DPT Integration is available when the KX TVP50 is connected to a KX TD digital PBX 1 4 2 APT Integration To the Panasonic KX TA analogue PBX the VPS ports look like proprietary telephones The PBX thinks that the VPS is a proprietary telephone and the VPS mimics all actions of a proprietary telephone Communication between the VPS and the PBX through digital integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4 wire connections for each port TVP50 To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through APT Integration the PBX and VPS must be programmed to work together 1 4 3 Connection Example APT Integration For example you can connect jack 7 of the KX TA series PBX to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4 wire connection see diag
317. y powerful feature Please see Custom Service in Appendix A SYSTEM FEATURES for more details Note n this manual the suffix of each model number is omitted n this manual there may be PBX model numbers which are not available in your country This product is only for connection behind a suitable PBX and should not be connected directly to the network This product complies with the essential requirements of the Directive 1999 5 EC Radio and telecommunications terminal equipment directive Important Information SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Read all the information contained in this manual Follow all product warnings cautions and instructions Install the unit so that the power cord is not obstructed in any way Do not connect this unit to an extension cord Mount the unit on a stable wall surface Do not mount the VPS inside of a separate enclosure unless it is properly ventilated Keep the unit free of dust moisture condensation high temperature exposure more than 40 C and vibration Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight This unit is designed to operate at one specific voltage and current setting The proper voltage and current required for this unit are listed on the product label This unit is equipped with a 3 wire earth plug The plug will only fit into a earth power outlet Do not modify this plug in any way If it cannot be inserted into the outlet have the outlet replaced by a licensed electrician
318. y the list of all mailbox numbers follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 179 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS The COS Class of Service parameters define the set of services that are available to Subscribers A maximum of 64 1 64 classes can be specified A class of service number can be assigned for each mailbox More than 1 Subscriber can share the same class of service e COS number 63 is only available to the Message Manager while COS number 64 is only available to the System Manager The following special features can only be utilised on a COS basis by following the procedure below Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery Auto Forwarding COS number 63 for the Message Manager can only utilise the Message Waiting Notification feature COS number 64 for the System Manager cannot utilise any of these features To access Class of Service Numbers 1 64 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 1 64 Note In Tables 36 and 37 sub parameters are underlined These sub parameters can be assigned only when the corresponding authorisation parameter is set to Yes 180 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sony FWD-50PX2/BT Dimensions Diagram  Istruzioni d`uso METTLER TOLEDO Bilance linea B • AB  Philips HP8360 hair straightener  Información para el usuario POLIPASTO DE  S752C129B  Nortec Industries MES-U User's Manual  Samedi 13 novembre - Festival européen du film court de Brest  syslib-rm040 - Literature Library  取扱説明書 設置・運転編  Samsung DIGIMAX L60 manual do usuário  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file